Silver halide color photographic photosensitive material

Abstract

A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material that has, on a support, at least one yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, wherein at least one specific yellow or magenta dye-forming coupler and at least one compound represented by formula (Ph) are contained in the same layer: wherein Rb1 represents a specific functional group; and Rb2 to Rb5 each independently represent a hydrogen or halogen atom, or a specific functional group.

Description

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to a silver halide color photographic photosensitive material. In particular, it relates to a silver halide color photographic photosensitive material that is excellent in rapid processing suitability, color forming properties, color reproduction, and image fastness after processing. Further, the present invention relates to a silver halide color photographic photosensitive material that is excellent in processing stability when processed with a running solution.

Further, the present invention relates to a silver halide color photographic photosensitive material that is excellent in fastness to light, especially, in yellow dye image areas and the white background area.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

In silver halide photographic photosensitive materials (hereinafter also referred to simply as “photosensitive material”) for subtractive color photography, a color image is formed by dyes of three primary colors of yellow, magenta, and cyan. In the color photography that uses current p-phenylenediamine-series color-developing agents, acylacetanilide-series compounds are used as a yellow coupler. However, the hue of yellow dyes obtained from these yellow couplers is reddish, due to an inferior sharpness of a peak of the absorption curve at the longer wavelength side (that is, on the absorption curve, the peak in interest has subsidiary absorption at its foot portion at the longer wavelength side), and it is difficult to obtain a yellow hue with high purity. Further, the above-mentioned dyes are sometimes easily decomposed under conditions of high temperature and high humidity, or of irradiation of light, and thus they have insufficient image storability after development processing. Further, because the molecular extinction coefficient of the dye is low, large quantities of the coupler and silver halide are needed to obtain a desired color density, which results in an increase in the film thickness of the photosensitive material. Such increased film thickness sometimes reduces sharpness of the dye image, and also becomes a serious hindrance to the rapid processing that has been strongly utilized in recent years. In this situation, improvement of these performances has been desired.

In order to solve these problems, improvement of acyl groups and anilido groups were proposed on the couplers. Recently, as improved couplers of the conventional acylacetanilide-series couplers, there were proposed, for example, 1-alkylcyclopropanecarbonyl acetanilide-series compounds, cyclomalondiamide-type couplers, pyrrole-2- or 3-yl- or indole-2- or 3-yl-carbonylacetanilide-series couplers. The dyes formed from these couplers were improved in terms of both hue and molecular extinction coefficient of dyes formed, compared with the conventional ones. However, they are not satisfactory in image storability still. Further, owing to their complicated chemical structure, the synthesis route became longer, and consequently cost of the couplers became higher, causing a practical problem. In addition, U.S. Pat. No. 3,841,880, JP-A-52-82423 (“JP-A” means unexamined published Japanese patent application) and JP-A-2-28645 propose acetic ester-series and acetanilide-series couplers to which 1,2,4-benzothiadiazine-1,1-dioxide is bonded. However, these couplers are low in color-forming property, and they are inferior in sharpness of a peak of the absorption curve owing to the subsidiary absorption at the foot portion on the longer wavelength side. European Patent Publication No. 1246006A discloses couplers that have improved color-developing property and bottom definition of the absorption in the longer wavelength side of the aforementioned acetic ester-series and acetic anilide-series couplers to which 1,2,4-benzothiadiazine-1,1-dioxide is bonded, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,841,880, JP-A-52-82423 and JP-A-2-28645. These couplers described in European Patent Publication No. 1246006A give dyes having high coloring property (color-forming property) and excellent absorption characteristics. However, dyes obtained from these couplers are insufficient in fastness to light at low-density areas, under conditions of storage at high temperature. As a situation in which a photograph is exposed to an ambient light under conditions of storage at high temperature, for example, a display in a commercial photo studio can be imagined. Further, because a low density of yellow is used in forming an image of a human face, the fastness of yellow in such a density region is important. In this situation, there is a demand for further improvement of the yellow image in the low-density region. The bisphenol compounds used in Examples of the above-mentioned European Patent Publication No. 1246006A are not always sufficient to improve the fastness to light under the above-described storage conditions. In particular, there has been known no effective means for improving photo stain. Therefore, further improvement has been desired.

Further, in the color photography using current p-phenylenediamine-series color-developing agents, as magenta dye-forming couplers (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as “magenta coupler”), pyrazoloazole-series magenta couplers have been preferably employed, from the view points of absorption characteristics and fastness to light. Of these couplers, 1H-pyrazolo[1,5-b][1,2,4]triazole-series magenta couplers having a tertiary alkyl group in the 6-position, and a phenylene group in the 2-position, as described in JP-A-1-302249, give a dye image having excellent fastness to light and heat. However, the couplers that are specifically disclosed in the aforementioned JP-A-1-302249 have a sulfonamido group in the meta-position of the phenylene group in the 2-position. In the spectral absorption characteristics of dyes obtained from such couplers having a substituent in the meta-position of the phenylene group in the 2-position, it has been found that the absorption at the foot portion is large and broadens. In view of color reproduction, there has been a demand for further improvement in the spectral absorption characteristics of these dyes. Further, it has been found that a photosensitive material containing the above-said coupler has problems in storability after exposure of the photosensitive material to development, such as fluctuation of photographic performances. In addition, there is a demand for photosensitive materials having minimized fluctuation of photographic performances against changes in compositions of processing solutions. A major factor of the change in the composition of a processing solution is increased contamination and accumulation of components from other processing-solutions, during running processing or intermittent continuous processing with an automatic processor. This phenomenon is significant when a replenisher amount is reduced, thereby resulting in reduction of the replenishment rate of a tank solution, or when use is made of a processing solution that has a longer workable period. The above “contamination of other processing solutions” is caused by a splash of a nearby solution, or by so-called back contamination in which components of the solution directly after the development step are carried into a color-developing solution, by a conveying leader or belt, a hanger hanging down a film, and so on. When the photosensitive material containing the coupler described in the aforementioned JP-A-1-302249 is processed with a color-developing solution contaminated by a fixing agent, which is one of these accumulating contamination components, the fluctuation of its photographic properties is great. Accordingly, further improvement in fluctuation has been desired.

Further, it has been found that photosensitive materials containing a coupler having a methyl group in the ortho-position of the phenylene group in the 2-position of the coupler, which said coupler is described in JP-A-3-48845, also has a problem that the color-forming property is low, in addition to the above-mentioned problems. Accordingly, further improvement of these couplers has been desired.

To solve these problems, further studies in improving of couplers were made. Such couplers were disclosed, for example, in JP-A-6-43611 and JP-A-2001-242606. However, 1H-pyrazolo[1,5-b][1,2,4]triazole-series magenta couplers, including these couplers, do not give satisfactory fastness to light in low-density portions. In particular, the low-density portion of magenta is an important density area in reproducing an image of a human face.

Further, for color papers, processing by means of a mini-lab has become predominant in recent years. Mini-labs are required not only high finished quality and stability but also so-called rapid processing suitability meaning the ability to process a great number of photographic papers in a small installation area.

The particular bisphenol compounds that are used in the aforementioned JP-A-6-43611 have the problem that the said bisphenol compound itself acts as a competing compound to a coupler, resulting in a reduction of developed color density in rapid processing.

In view of this situation, development of technologies that realize high fastness to light in the low-density area and high developed color density even in rapid processing, has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention resides in a silver halide color photographic photosensitive material comprising, on a support, at least one yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, wherein at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) set forth below or at least one magenta dye-forming coupler, represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) set forth below is included in the same layer as at least one compound represented by formula (Ph) set forth below:

• • wherein, in formula (I), Q represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N(R_1a)—; R_1a represents a substituent; R_2a represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 or more and 5 or less; when m is 2 or more, R_2as may be the same or different, and they may combine together to form a ring; and X₁ represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent;
  • wherein, in formula (M-I), Y₁ and Y₂ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group; R₁ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₂ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₂ has a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; p represents 0, 1, or 2; and when p is 2, a plurality of R₁s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-II), Y₃ and Y₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group; R₃ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₄ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₄ has a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; q represents 0, 1, or 2; and when q is 2, a plurality of R₃s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-III), L₁ represents —NR₇— or —O—; R₅ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₆ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R₇ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₆ and R₇ have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; r represents 0, 1, or 2; and when r is 2, a plurality of R₅s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-IV), L₂ represents —NR₁₀— or —O—; R₈ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₉ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R₁₀ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₉ and R₁₀ have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; s represents 0, 1, or 2; and when s is 2, a plurality of R₈s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-V), R₁₁ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₁₂ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group; R₁₃ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a sulfinyl group, or a hydroxyl group; R₁₄ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group; X represents a halogen atom; t represents 0, 1, or 2; and when t is 2, a plurality of R₁₁s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-VI), R₁₅ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₁₆, R₁₇, and R₁₈ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group; X represents a halogen atom; u represents 0, 1, or 2; and when u is 2, a plurality of R₁₅s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-VII), R₁₉ and R₂₀ each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; v and w each independently represent 0 or 1, but both v and w are not 0s at the same time; L₃ represents —NR₂₂— or —O—; X represents 0 or 1; R₂₁ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R₂₂ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₂₁ and R₂₂ have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; and X represents a halogen atom;
  • wherein, in formula (M-VIII), R₂₃ and R₂₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; R₂₅ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R₂₆ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; y represents 0, 1, or 2; when y is 2, a plurality of R₂₆s may be the same or different; L₄ represents a divalent linking group selected from —(C═O)—, —(C═O)—O—, —O—(C═O)—, —(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —O—(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—O—, —O—, —S—, —SO—, —SO₂—, and —NR₂₇—; R₂₇ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₂₅ and R₂₇ have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; and X represents a halogen atom;
  • wherein, in formula (M-IX), R₂₈ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₂₈ has a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; R₂₉ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; X represents a halogen atom; z represents 0, 1, or 2; and when z is 2, a plurality of R₂₉s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-X), R₃₁ represents a tertiary alkyl group; R₃₂ and R₃₃ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; X represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an aryloxy group; A and B each independently represent —CO— or —SO₂—; a represents 0 or 1; R₃₄ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group; R₃₅ represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylamino group or an arylamino group; and R₃₄ and R₃₅ may bond with each other to form a 5- to 7-membered ring;
  • wherein, in formula (Ph), R_b1 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; and R_b2 to R_b5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.

Other and further features and advantages of the invention will appear more fully from the following description.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

According to the present invention, there are provided the following means:

(1) A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material comprising, on a support, at least one yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, wherein at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) set forth below or at least one magenta dye-forming coupler, represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) set forth below is included in the same layer as at least one compound represented by formula (Ph) set forth below:

• • wherein, in formula (I), Q represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N(R_1a)—; R_1a represents a substituent; R_2a represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 or more and 5 or less; when m is 2 or more, R₂ as may be the same or different, and they may combine together to form a ring; and X₁ represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent;
  • wherein, in formula (M-I), Y₁ and Y₂ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group; R₁ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₂ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₂ has a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; p represents 0, 1, or 2; and when p is 2, a plurality of R₁s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-II), Y₃ and Y₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group; R₃ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₄ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₄ has a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; q represents 0, 1, or 2; and when q is 2, a plurality of R₃s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-III), L₁ represents —NR₇— or —O—; R₅ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₆ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R₇ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₆ and R₇ have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; r represents 0, 1, or 2; and when r is 2, a plurality of R₅s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-IV), L₂ represents —NR₁₀— or —O—; R₈ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₉ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R₁₀ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₉ and R₁₀ have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; s represents 0, 1, or 2; and when s is 2, a plurality of R₈s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-V), R₁₁ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₁₂ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group; R₁₃ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a sulfinyl group, or a hydroxyl group; R₁₄ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group; X represents a halogen atom; t represents 0, 1, or 2; and when t is 2, a plurality of R₁₁s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-VI), R₁₅ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₁₆, R₁₇, and R₁₈ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group; X represents a halogen atom; u represents 0, 1, or 2; and when u is 2, a plurality of R₁₅s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-VII), R₁₉ and R₂₀ each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; v and w each independently represent 0 or 1, but both v and w are not 0s at the same time; L₃ represents —NR₂₂— or —O—; X represents 0 or 1; R₂₁ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R₂₂ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₂₁ and R₂₂ have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; and X represents a halogen atom;
  • wherein, in formula (M-VIII), R₂₃ and R₂₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; R₂₅ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R₂₆ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; y represents 0, 1, or 2; when y is 2, a plurality of R₂₆s may be the same or different; L₄ represents a divalent linking group selected from —(C═O)—, —(C═O)—O—, —O—(C═O)—, —(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —O—(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—O—, —O—, —S—, —SO—, —SO₂—, and —NR₂₇—; R₂₇ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₂₅ and R₂₇ have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; and X represents a halogen atom;
  • wherein, in formula (M-IX), R₂₈ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₂₈ has a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; R₂₉ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; X represents a halogen atom; z represents 0, 1, or 2; and when z is 2, a plurality of R₂₉s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-X), R₃₁ represents a tertiary alkyl group; R₃₂ and R₃₃ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; X represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an aryloxy group; A and B each independently represent —CO— or —SO₂—; a represents 0 or 1; R₃₄ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group; R₃₅ represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylamino group or an arylamino group; and R₃₄ and R₃₅ may bond with each other to form a 5- to 7-membered ring;
  • wherein, in formula (Ph), R_b1 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; and R_b2 to R_b5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.

(2) A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material comprising, on a support, at least one yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, wherein a yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer comprises at least one yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) set forth below, at least one compound represented by formula (TS-II) set forth below, and at least one compound represented by formula (Ph) set forth below:

• • wherein, in formula (I), Q represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N(R_1a)—; R_1a represents a substituent; R_2a represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 or more and 5 or less; when m is 2 or more, R_2as may be the same or different, and they may combine together to form a ring; and X₁ represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-II), R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃, and R₆₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group; each combination of R₆₁ and R₆₂, and R₆₃ and R₆₄ may bond to each other to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; X₆₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryloxycarbonyloxy group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, an aliphatic sulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, a hydroxyl group, or an oxy radical group; X₆₂ represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary to form a 5- to 7-membered ring together with the —C(—R₆₁)(—R₆₂)—N(—X₆₁)—C(—R₆₃)(—R₆₄)—;
  • wherein, in formula (Ph), R_b1 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; and R_b2 to R_b5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.

(3) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to the preceding item (2), further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of the compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) set forth below:

• • wherein, in formulae (E-1) to (E-3), R₄₁ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or a —Si (R₄₇)(R₄₈)(R₄₉), in which R₄₇, R₄₈ and R₄₉ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group; R₄₂ to R₄₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent; and Ra₁ to Ra₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group.

(4) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to the preceding item (2) or (3), further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I), (TS-III), (TS-IV), (TS-V), (TS-VI), and (TS-VII) set forth below, a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent and a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer:

• • wherein, in formula (TS-I), R₅₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or —Si(R₅₈)(R₅₉)(R₆₀), in which R₅₈, R₅₉, and R₆₀ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group; X₅₁ represents —O— or —N(R₅₇)—, in which R₅₇ has the same meaning as R₅₁; X₅₅ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₂)═; X₅₆ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₄)═; X₅₇ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₆)═; R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅, and R₅₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent; each combination of R₅₁ and R₅₂, R₅₇ and R₅₆, and R₅₁ and R₅₇ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; each combination of R₅₂ and R₅₃, and R₅₃ and R₅₄ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring, a spiro ring, or a bicyclo ring; each of R₅₁ to R₅₇ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; the total number of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is 10 or more; and the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is neither identical to the compound represented by formula (Ph) nor the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3);
  • wherein, in formula (TS-III), R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, or an aryl sulfonyl group; R₆₇ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic thio group, an arylthio group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, a substituted amino group, a heterocyclic group, or a hydroxyl group; each combination of R₆₅ and R₆₆, and R₆₆ and R₆₇, and R₆₅ and R₆₇ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except 2,2,6,6-tetraalkylpiperidine skeleton; the total number of carbon atoms of R₆₅ and R₆₆ is 7 or more; and both R₆₅ and R₆₆ are not hydrogen atoms at the same time;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-IV), R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, Li, Na, or K; R₇₂ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; R₇₁ and R₇₂ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; q1 represents 0, 1 or 2; and the total number of carbon atoms of R₇₁ and R₇₂ is 10 or more;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-V), R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic amino group, or an aryl amino group; t1 represents 0 or 1; each combination of R₈₁ and R₈₂, and R₈₁ and R₈₃ may combine together to form a 5- to 8-membered ring; and the total number of carbon atoms of R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ is 10 or more;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-VI), R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇, and R₈₈ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent, and any two of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except an aromatic ring only consisting of carbon atoms as a skeleton atom; the total number of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-VI) is 10 or more; and each of R₈₅ to R₈₈ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and
  • wherein, in formula (TS-VII), R₉₁ represents an hydrophobic group having total carbon atoms of 10 or more; and Y₉₁ represents a monovalent organic group containing an alcoholic hydroxyl group;

(5) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to any one of the above items (2) to (4), wherein the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) is a yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II):

• • wherein, in formula (II), R_1a represents a substituent; R_2a represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 to 5; when m is 2 or more, a plurality of R_2as may be the same or different, and the R₂ as may bond each other to form a ring; R_3a represents a substituent; n represents an integer of 0 to 4; when n is 2 or more, a plurality of R₃ as may be the same or different, and the R_3as may bond each other to form a ring; and X₁ represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.

(6) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to the above item (5), wherein, in the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by the above-mentioned formula (II), R_1a is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.

(7) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to the preceding item (6), wherein, in the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II) set forth above, R_1a represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having at least 2 carbon atoms; m is an integer of from 1 to 5; at least one R_2a is located in an ortho-position to the —CONH— group, and is a group or atom selected from a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkyl group, an alkylthio group and an arylthio group; and X₁ is a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidation product of a developing agent.

(8) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to the preceding item (7), wherein, in the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II) set forth above, R_1a is an alkoxypropyl group; and at least one R_2a is an alkylthio group located in an ortho-position to the —CONH— group.

(9) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to the preceding item (8), wherein, in the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II) set forth above, at least one of R_2a is an alkylthio group located in an ortho-position to the —CONH— group, and another R_2a is a t-butyl group located in the para-position to the alkylthio group.

(10) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to any one of the preceding items (5) to (9), wherein, in the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II) set forth above, X₁ is a 5,5-dimethyloxazolidine-2,4-dione-3-yl group.

(Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention means to include the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material described in the items (2) to (10) above.)

(11) A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material comprising, on a support, at least one yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer,

• • wherein at least one yellow-dye forming coupler represented by formula (Ia) set forth below is incorporated in the same layer as at least one compound represented by formula (Ph) set forth below:
  • wherein, in formula (Ia), Qa represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N((CH₂)₃O—R_11a)—; R_11a represents an alkyl group having carbon atoms of 4 or more and 8 or less; R_2a represents a substituent; R_14a represents a primary alkyl group; m_a represents an integer of 0 or more and 4 or less; when m_a is 2 or more, R_2as may be the same or different, and they may combine together to form a ring; and X₁ represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent;
  • wherein, in formula (Ph), R_b1 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; and R_b2 to R_b5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.

(12) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to the above item (11), wherein the compound represented by formula (Ph) is a compound represented by any one of formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3):

• • wherein, in formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3), R_b1 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; R_b6 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an amino group, or an acyl group; R_b7 to R_b9, R_b11 to R_b16, R_b19, and R_b20 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group; R_b10 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an acyl group, an oxycarbonyl group, a silyl group, or a phosphoryl group; and X_b represents an alkylene-linking group, a phenylene-linking group, an —O— linking group, or a —S— linking group; R_b17 and R_b18 each independently represent an aliphatic group, or an aryl group.

(13) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to the preceding item (11) or (12), further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) set forth below:

• • wherein, in formulae (E-1) to (E-3), R₄₁ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or a —Si(R₄₇)(R₄₈)(R₄₉), in which R₄₇, R₄₈ and R₄₉ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group; R₄₂ to R₄₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent; and Ra₁ to Ra₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group.

(14) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to any one of the preceding items (11) or (13), further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII) set forth below, a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent and a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer:

• • wherein, in formula (TS-I), R₅₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or —Si(R₅₈)(R₅₉)(R₆₀) in which R₅₈, R₅₉, and R₆₀ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group; X₅₁ represents —O— or —N(R₅₇)—, in which R₅₇ has the same meaning as R₅₁; X₅₅ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₂)═; X₅₆ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₄)═; X₅₇ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₆)═; R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅, and R₅₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent; each combination of R₅₁ and R₅₂, R₅₇ and R₅₆, and R₅₁ and R₅₇ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; each combination of R₅₂ and R₅₃, and R₅₃ and R₅₄ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring, a spiro ring, or a bicyclo ring; each of R₅₁ to R₅₇ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is 10 or more; and the compound represented by formulae (TS-I) is neither identical to the compound represented by formula (Ph) nor the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3);
  • wherein, in formula (TS-II), R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃, and R₆₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group; each combination of R₆₁ and R₆₂, and R₆₃ and R₆₄ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; X₆₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, an aliphatic sulfinyl group, an aryl sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, a hydroxy group, or an oxy radical group; X₆₂ represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary to form a 5- to 7-membered ring together with the —C(—R₆₁)(—R₆₂)—N(—X₆₁)—C(—R₆₃)(—R₆₄)—; and the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-II) is 8 or more;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-III), R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, or an aryl sulfonyl group; R₆₇ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic thio group, an arylthio group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, a substituted amino group, a heterocyclic group, or a hydroxyl group; each combination of R₆₅ and R₆₆, and R₆₆ and R₆₇, and R₆₅ and R₆₇ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except 2,2,6,6-tetraalkylpiperidine skeleton; the total of carbon atoms of R₆₅ and R₆₆ is 7 or more; and each of R₆₅ and R₆₆ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-IV), R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, Li, Na, or K; R₇₂ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; R₇₁ and R₇₂ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; q1 represents 0, 1 or 2; and the total of carbon atoms of R₇₁ and R₇₂ is 10 or more;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-V), R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic amino group, or an aryl amino group; t1 represents 0 or 1; each combination of R₈₁ and R₈₂, and R₈₁ and R₈₃ may combine together to form a 5- to 8-membered ring; and the total of carbon atoms of R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ is 10 or more;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-VI), R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇, and R₈₈ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent, and any two of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except an aromatic ring only consisting of carbon atoms as a skeleton atom; the total of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-VI) is 10 or more; and each of R₈₅ to R₈₈ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and
  • wherein, in formula (TS-VII), R₉₁ represents an hydrophobic group having total carbon atoms of 10 or more; and Y₉₁ represents a monovalent organic group containing an alcoholic hydroxyl group. (Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention means to include the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material described in the items (11) to (14) above.)

(15) A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material comprising, on a support, at least one yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer,

• • wherein at least one magenta dye-forming coupler, represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) set forth below is incorporated in the same layer as at least one compound represented by formula (Ph-1) or (Ph-3) set forth below:
  • wherein, in formula (M-I), Y₁ and Y₂ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group; R₁ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₂ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₂ has a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; p represents 0, 1, or 2; and when p is 2, a plurality of R₁s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-II), Y₃ and Y₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group; R₃ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₄ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₄ has a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; q represents 0, 1, or 2; and when q is 2, a plurality of R₃s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-III), L₁ represents —NR₇— or. —O—; R₅ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₆ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R₇ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₆ and R₇ have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; r represents 0, 1, or 2; and when r is 2, a plurality of R₅s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-IV), L₂ represents —NR₁₀— or —O—; R₈ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₉ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R₁₀ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₉ and R₁₀ have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; s represents 0, 1, or 2; and when s is 2, a plurality of R₈s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-V), R₁₁ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₁₂ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group; R₁₃ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a sulfinyl group, or a hydroxyl group; R₁₄ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group; X represents a halogen atom; t represents 0, 1, or 2; and when t is 2, a plurality of R₁₁s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-VI), R₁₅ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R₁₆, R₁₇, and R₁₈ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group; X represents a halogen atom; u represents 0, 1, or 2; and when u is 2, a plurality of R₁₅s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-VII), R₁₉ and R₂₀ each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; v and w each independently represent 0 or 1, and both v and w are not 0s at the same time; L₃ represents —NR₂₂— or —O—; X represents 0 or 1; R₂₁ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R₂₂ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₂₁ and R₂₂ have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; and X represents a halogen atom;
  • wherein, in formula (M-VIII), R₂₃ and R₂₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; R₂₅ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R₂₆ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; y represents 0, 1, or 2; when y is 2, a plurality of R₂₆s may be the same or different; L₄ represents a divalent linking group selected from —(C═O)—, —(C═O)—O—, —O—(C═O)—, —(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —O—(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—O—, —O—, —S—, —SO—, —SO₂—, and —NR₂₇—; R₂₇ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₂₅ and R₂₇ have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; and X represents a halogen atom;
  • wherein, in formula (M-IX), R₂₈ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R₂₈ has a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; R₂₉ represents an alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; X represents a halogen atom; z represents 0, 1, or 2; and when z is 2, a plurality of R₂₉s may be the same or different;
  • wherein, in formula (M-X), R₃₁ represents a tertiary alkyl group; R₃₂ and R₃₃ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; X represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an aryloxy group; A and B each independently represent —CO— or —SO₂—; a represents 0 or 1; R₃₄ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group; R₃₅ represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylamino group or an arylamino group; and R₃₄ and R₃₅ may bond with each other to form a 5- to 7-membered ring;
  • wherein, in formulae (Ph-1) and (Ph-3), R_b1 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; R_b6 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an amino group, or an acyl group; R_b7 to R_b9, R_b19, and R_b20 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group; and R_b17 and R_b18 each independently represent an aliphatic group or an aryl group.

(16) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to the preceding item (15), wherein the compound represented by formula (Ph-1) or (Ph-3) is a compound represented by formula (Ph-4):

• • wherein, in formula (Ph-4), R_b21 represents a straight-chain, or branched, or cyclic, saturated or unsaturated, and unsubstituted aliphatic group, or a straight-chain, or branched, or cyclic, and saturated or unsaturated aliphatic group substituted with a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, —SR_b30, —CONR_b30R_b31, —CO₂R_b30, or —OC(═O)R_b30, in which R_b30 and R_b31 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a straight-chain, branched, or cyclic unsubstituted aliphatic group.

(17) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to the preceding item (16), wherein, in the compound represented by the above-mentioned formula (Ph-4), R_b21 is a straight-chain, branched, or cyclic, saturated or unsaturated, and unsubstituted aliphatic group.

(18) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to the preceding item (16) or (17), wherein, in the compound represented by the above-mentioned formula (Ph-4), the sum total of carbon atoms in R_b21 is at least 12.

(19) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to any one of the preceding items (15) to (18), further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) set forth below:

• • wherein, in formulae (E-1) to (E-3), R₄₁ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or a —Si(R₄₇)(R₄₈)(R₄₉), in which R₄₇, R₄₈ and R₄₉ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group; R₄₂ to R₄₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent; and Ra₁ to Ra₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group.

(20) The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material according to any one of the preceding items (15) or (19), further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII) set forth below: R₉₁—Y₉₁  Formula (TS-VII)

• • wherein, in formula (TS-I), R₅₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or —Si(R₅₈)(R₅₉) (R₆₀) in which R₅₈, R₅₉, and R₆₀ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group; X₅₁ represents —O— or —N(R₅₇)—, in which R₅₇ has the same meaning as R₅₁; X₅₅ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₂)═; X₅₆ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₄)═; X₅₇ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₆)═; R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅, and R₅₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent; each combination of R₅₁ and R₅₂, R₅₇ and R₅₆, and R₅₁ and R₅₇ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; each combination of R₅₂ and R₅₃, and R₅₃ and R₅₄ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring, a spiro ring, or a bicyclo ring; wherein the total number of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is 10 or more; the compound represented by formulae (TS-I) is neither identical to the compound represented by any one of formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-3) and (Ph-4) nor the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3); and each of R₅₁ to R₅₇ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-II), R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃, and R₆₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group; each combination of R₆, and R₆₂, and R₆₃ and R₆₄ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; X₆₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, an aliphatic sulfinyl group, an aryl sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, a hydroxy group, or an oxy radical group; and X₆₂ represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary to form a 5- to 7-membered ring together with the —C(—R₆₁)(—R₆₂)—N(—X₆₁)—C(—R₆₃)(—R₆₄)—; and the total number of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-II) is 8 or more;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-III), R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, or an aryl sulfonyl group; R₆₇ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic thio group, an arylthio group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryl oxycarbonyloxy group, a substituted amino group, a heterocyclic group, or a hydroxyl group; each combination of R₆₅ and R₆₆, and R₆₆ and R₆₇, and R₆₅ and R₆₇ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except 2,2,6,6-tetraalkylpiperidine skeleton; the total number of carbon atoms of R₆₅ and R₆₆ is 7 or more; and each of R₆₅ and R₆₆ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-IV), R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, Li, Na, or K; R₇₂ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; R₇₁ and R₇₂ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; q1 represents 0, 1 or 2; and the total number of carbon atoms of R₇₁ and R₇₂ is 10 or more;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-V), R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, an aliphatic amino group, or an aryl amino group; t1 represents 0 or 1; each combination of R₈₁ and R₈₂, and R₈₁ and R₈₃ may combine together to form a 5- to 8-membered ring; and the total number of carbon atoms of R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ is 10 or more;
  • wherein, in formula (TS-VI), R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇, and R₈₈ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent, and any two of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇ and R₈₈ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring except an aromatic ring only consisting of carbon atoms as a skeleton atom; the total number of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-VI) is 10 or more; and each of R₈₅ to R₈₈ cannot simultaneously represent a hydrogen atom; and
  • wherein, in formula (TS-VII), R₉₁ represents an hydrophobic group having total carbon atoms of 10 or more; and Y₉₁ represents a monovalent organic group containing an alcoholic hydroxyl group. (Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention means to include the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material described in the items (15) to (20) above.)

Herein, the present invention means to include each of the above first, second and third embodiments, unless otherwise specified.

The present invention is explained below in detail.

The term “aliphatic group” used in the present specification means such groups, in which the aliphatic portion may be a saturated or unsaturated, straight chain, branched chain, or a cycle, and the aliphatic portion embraces, for example, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkyl group, and a cycloalkenyl group; and these can be unsubstituted or substituted. Further, the term “aryl group” used herein means a substituted or unsubstituted, monocyclic or condensed ring. The term “heterocyclic group” used herein means such groups, in which the heterocycle portion contains a hetero atom(s) (such as nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen atoms) in the ring skeleton, and the heterocycle embraces a substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, and monocyclic or condensed ring.

The term “substituent” used in the present specification means any groups or atoms that are able to substitute for other groups or atoms; and embraces, for example, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an acylamino group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a heterocyclic sulfonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyloxy group, an arylsulfonyloxy group, a heterocyclic sulfonyloxy group, a sulfamoyl group, an aliphatic sulfonamido group, an aryl sulfonamido group, a heterocyclic sulfonamido group, an amino group, an aliphatic amino group, an arylamino group, a heterocyclic amino group, an aliphatic oxycarbonylamino group, an aryloxycarbonylamino group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonylamino group, an aliphatic sulfinyl group, an aryl sulfinyl group, an aliphatic thio group, an arylthio group, a hydroxy group, a cyano group, a sulfo group, a carboxyl group, an aliphatic oxyamino group, an aryloxyamino group, a carbamoylamino group, a sulfamoylamino group, a halogen atom, a sulfamoylcarbamoyl group, a carbamoylsulfamoyl group, a dialiphatic oxyphosphinyl group, and a diaryloxyphosphinyl group.

First, the compound represented by formula (I) for use in the present invention is explained in detail. In the present specification, the compound is also referred to as a yellow dye-forming coupler. In particular, this compound is preferably used in the first embodiment of the present invention.

In formula, R_1a represents a substituent except for a hydrogen atom. As examples of the substituent, there are illustrated a halogen atom, an alkyl group in which a cycloalkyl group and a bicycloalkyl group are embraced; an alkenyl group in which a cycloalkenyl group and a bicycloalkenyl group are embraced; an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, a nitro group, a carboxyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a silyloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyloxy group, an aryloxycarbonyloxy group, an amino group in which an alkylamino group and an anilino group are embraced; an acylamino group, an aminocarbonylamino group, an alkoxycarbonylamino group, an aryloxycarbonylamino group, a sulfamoylamino group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonylamino group, a mercapto group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a heterocyclic thio group, a sulfamoyl group, a sulfo group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfinyl group, an alkyl- or aryl-sulfonyl group, an acyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aryl- or heterocyclic-azo group, an imido group, a phosphino group, a phosphinyl group, a phosphinyloxy group, a phosphinylamino group, and a silyl group.

These substituents may be further substituted with another substituent. Examples of this another substituent are the same as described as the examples of the above-mentioned substituent.

R_1a is preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group. The total of carbon atoms of R_1a is preferably in the range of from 1 to 60, more preferably in the range of from 2 to 50, furthermore preferably in the range of from 4 to 40, and most preferably in the range of from 7 to 30. When R_1a is a substituted alkyl group, can be mentioned as the substituent are atoms and groups set forth as examples of the substituent of the above-mentioned R_1a.

R_1a is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group having the total of carbon atoms of at least 11, or a substituted alkyl group substituted with an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group in the 2-, 3-, or 4-position, and having the total of carbon atoms of at least 4 including the number of carbon atoms of substituents, more preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group having the total of carbon atoms of at least 16, or a substituted alkyl group substituted with an alkoxy group or an aryloxy group in the 3-position, and having the total of carbon atoms of at least 6 including the number of carbon atoms of substituents, furthermore preferably a C₁₆H₃₃ group, a C₁₈H₃₇ group, a 3-lauryloxypropyl group, a 3-hexyloxy propyl group, a 3-butoxypropyl group, or a 3-(2,4-di-t-amylphenoxy)propyl group, and most preferably a 3-butoxypropyl group.

In formula (I), Q represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N(R_1a)—. Preferably, the 5- to 7-membered ring thus formed is a substituted or unsubstituted, and monocyclic or condensed heterocycle. More preferably, the ring-forming atoms are selected from carbon, nitrogen and sulfur atoms. Still more preferably, Q represents a group represented by —C(—R_21a)═C(—R_22a)—SO₂— or —C(—R_21a)═C(—R_22a)—CO— (in the present invention, these expressions of the foregoing group do not limit the bonding orientation of the group in formula (I), to the ones shown by these expressions). R_21a and R_22a are groups that bond each other to form a 5- to 7-membered ring together with the —C═C— moiety, or R_21a and R_22a each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent. The 5- to 7-membered ring thus formed may be saturated or unsaturated, and the ring may be an alicyclic, aromatic or heterocyclic ring. Examples of the ring include benzene, furan, thiophene, cyclopentane, and cyclohexane rings, each of which may be further substituted. Further, when R_21a and R_22a represent a substituent, examples thereof are those enumerated as the substituent of the above-described R_1a (hereinafter also referred to as the substituent of R_1a).

These substituents and the rings formed through bonding of multiple substituents may be further substituted with another substituent. Examples of this another substituent are the same as described as the examples of the above-mentioned substituent of R_1a.

In formula (I), R_2a represents a substituent except for a hydrogen atom. Examples of the substituent are the atoms and groups set forth as the substituent of R_1a. R_2a is preferably a halogen atom (for example, fluorine, chlorine, bromine), an alkyl group (for example, methyl, isopropyl, t-butyl), an aryl group (for example, phenyl, naphthyl), an alkoxy group (for example, methoxy, isopropyloxy), an aryloxy group (for example, phenoxy), an alkylthio group (for example, methylthio, octylthio), an arylthio group (for example, phenylthio, 2-methoxyphenylthio), an acyloxy group (for example, acetyloxy), an amino group (for example, dimethylamino, morpholino), an acylamino group (for example, acetamido), a sulfonamido group (for example, methane sulfonamido, benzene sulfonamido), an alkoxycarbonyl group (for example, methoxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (for example, phenoxycarbonyl), a carbamoyl group (for example, N-methylcarbamoyl, N,N-diethylcarbamoyl), a sulfamoyl group (for example, N-methylsulfamoyl, N,N-diethylsulfamoyl), an alkylsulfonyl group (for example, methane sulfonyl), an arylsulfonyl group (for example, benzene sulfonyl), a cyano group, a carboxyl group, and a sulfo group. R_2a, when located in an ortho-position to the —CONH— group, is preferably a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkyl group, an alkylthio group and an arylthio group, and more preferably an alkylthio group. Further, it is preferred that R_2a is also located in the para-position to a substituent located in an ortho-position to the above-described —CONH— group. In this case, R_2a located in the para-position is an alkyl group, preferably a t-alkyl group, more preferably a t-butyl group. It is most preferred that R_2a located in the 2-position to the —CONH— group is a 2-ethylhexylthio group, and another R_2a located in the 5-position to the —CONH— group is a t-butyl group.

In formula (I), m represents an integer of 0 or more and 5 or less. When m is 2 or more, R₂ as may be the same or different, and they may combine together to form a ring. From the point of the effects of the present invention, m is preferably in the range of 1 to 3.

In formula (I), X₁ represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent. Examples of the group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent include a group that splits off with a nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur atom (a splitting-off atom); and a halogen atom (e.g., chlorine, bromine).

Examples of the group that splits off with a nitrogen atom include a heterocyclic group (preferably a 5- to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted saturated or unsaturated aromatic (herein the term “aromatic” is used to embrace a substance that has (4n+2) cyclic conjugated electrons) or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group; more preferably a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic group, in which the ring-forming atoms are selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur atoms and in addition at least one of hetero atoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur atoms is incorporated; specific examples of the heterocyclic group include succinimido, maleinimido, phthalimido, diglycolimido, pyrrole, pyrazole, imidazole, 1,2,4-triazole, tetrazole, indole, benzopyrazole, benzimidazole, benzotriazole, imidazolidine-2,4-dione, oxazolidine-2,4-dione, thiazolidine-2-one, benzimidazoline-2-one, benzoxazoline-2-one, benzothiazoline-2-one, 2-pyrroline-5-one, 2-imidazoline-5-one, indoline-2,3-dione, 2,6-dioxypurine, parabanic acid, 1,2,4-triazolidine-3,5-dione, 2-pyridone, 4-pyridone, 2-pyrimidone, 6-pyridazone, 2-pyrazone, 2-amino-1,3,4-thiazolidine-4-one), a carbonamido group (e.g., acetamido, trifluoroacetamido), a sulfonamido group (e.g., methanesulfonamido, benzenesulfonamido), an arylazo group (e.g., phenylazo, naphthylazo), and a carbamoylamino group (e.g., N-methyl carbamoylamino).

Preferred of the group that splits off with a nitrogen atom are heterocyclic groups, more preferably aryl heterocyclic groups having 1, 2, 3 or 4 ring-forming nitrogen atoms, or heterocyclic groups represented by the following formula (L):

• • wherein L represents a moiety that forms a 5- to 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocycle with the —NC(═O)—.

Examples of the moiety are enumerated in the explanation of the above-mentioned heterocyclic group, and such moieties as enumerated above are more preferred. Particularly preferably, L is a moiety that forms a 5-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring.

Examples of the group that splits off with an oxygen atom include an aryloxy group (e.g., phenoxy, 1-naphthoxy), a heterocyclic oxy group (e.g., pyridyloxy, pyrazolyloxy), an acyloxy group (e.g., acetoxy, benzoyloxy), an alkoxy group (e.g., methoxy, dodecyloxy), a carbamoyloxy group (e.g., N,N-diethylcarbamoyloxy, morpholinocarbamoyloxy), an aryloxycarbonyloxy group (e.g., phenoxycarbonyloxy), an alkoxycarbonyloxy group (e.g., methoxycarbonyloxy, ethoxycarbonyloxy), an alkylsulfonyloxy group (e.g., methanesulfonyloxy), and an aryl sulfonyloxy group (e.g., benzenesulfonyloxy, toluenesulfonyloxy).

Preferred of the group that splits off with an oxygen atom are an aryloxy group, an acyloxy group and a heterocyclic oxy group.

Examples of the group that splits off with a sulfur atom include an arylthio group (e.g., phenylthio, naphthylthio), a heterocyclic thio group (e.g., tetrazolylthio, 1,3,4-thiadiazolylthio, 1,3,4-oxazolylthio, benzimidazolyl thio), an alkylthio group (e.g., methylthio, octylthio, hexadecylthio), an alkylsulfinyl group (e.g., methane sulfinyl), an arylsulfinyl group (e.g., benzenesulfinyl), an arylsulfonyl group (e.g., benzenesulfonyl), and an alkylsulfonyl group (e.g., methansulfonyl).

Preferred of the group that splits off with a sulfur atom are an arylthio group and a heterocyclic thio group. A heterocyclic thio group is more preferred.

X₁ may be substituted with a substituent. Examples of the substituent substituting on X₁ include those exemplified as the substituent of the above-mentioned R_1a.

X₁ is preferably a group that splits off with a nitrogen atom, a group that splits off with an oxygen atom, or a group that splits off with a sulfur atom. More preferably X₁ is a group that splits off with a nitrogen atom, and further preferably X₁ is one of the above-mentioned preferable examples of the group that splits off with a nitrogen atom, and they are preferable in the described order.

Particularly preferably, X₁ is a 5,5-dimethyl oxazolidine-2,4-dione-3-yl group.

X₁ may be a photographically useful group. Examples of the photographically useful group include a development inhibitor, a desilvering accelerator, a redox compound, a dye, a coupler, and precursors of these compounds.

In order to render the coupler immobile in the photosensitive material, at least one of Q, R_1a, X₁ and R_2a has preferably 8 to 60 carbon atoms, more preferably 8 to 50 carbon atoms in total respectively, including carbon atoms of substituent(s) thereon.

In the present invention, especially in the first embodiment of the present invention, it is preferable, from the point of the effects of the present invention, that the compound represented by formula (I) is a compound represented by formula (II). Here, the compound represented by formula (II) is also referred to as a yellow dye-forming coupler. The compound represented by formula (II) is explained in detail below.

In formula (II), R_1a, R_2a, m, and X₁ each have the same meanings as described in formula (I). Preferable ranges thereof are also the same.

In formula (II), R_3a represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent include those groups and atoms exemplified as the substituent of the above-mentioned R_1a. Preferably R_3a is a halogen atom (i.e., fluorine, chlorine, bromine), an alkyl group (e.g., methyl, isopropyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, naphthyl), an alkoxy group (e.g., methoxy, isopropyloxy), an aryloxy group (e.g., phenoxy), an acyloxy group (e.g., acetyloxy), an amino group (e.g., dimethylamino, morpholino), an acylamino group (e.g., acetamido), a sulfonamido group (e.g., methanesulfonamido, benzenesulfonamido), an alkoxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (e.g., phenoxycarbonyl), a carbamoyl group (e.g., N-methylcarbamoyl, N,N-diethylcarbamoyl), a sulfamoyl group (e.g., N-methylsulfamoyl, N,N-diethylsulfamoyl), an alkylsulfonyl group (e.g., methane sulfonyl), an arylsulfonyl group (e.g., benzene sulfonyl), a cyano group, a carboxyl group, and a sulfo group.

n represents an integer of 0 to 4. When n is 2 or more, the multiple R₃ as may be the same or different, and the R₃ as may bond each other to form a ring.

In the present invention, preferably in the first embodiment of the present invention, among the dye-forming couplers represented by formula (II), the compound represented by formula (III) is more preferable.

In formula (III), R_1a, R_2a, R_3a, n, and X₁ each have the same meanings as described in formula (II). Preferable ranges thereof are also the same.

R_4a represents an alkyl group. m′ represents an integer of from 0 to 4. When m′ is 2 or more, a plurality of R₂ as may be the same or different, and they may bond to each other to form a ring. m′ is preferably 0, 1, or 2, more preferably 0 or 1, and most preferably 1.

The alkyl group of R_4a may have a substituent. As the substituent, atoms and groups set forth as a substituent of the above-mentioned R_1a can be mentioned. The substituent is preferably an alkyl group and an aryl group, more preferably an alkyl group. The alkyl group of R_4a is preferably a primary alkyl group or a tertiary alkyl group, more preferably a primary alkyl group, furthermore preferably a primary alkyl group that is branched at the β-position, and most preferably a 2-ethylhexyl group.

The total of carbon atoms of R_4a including its substituent is preferably in the range of from 1 to 30, more preferably in the range of from 3 to 30, furthermore preferably in the range of from 3 to 20, and most preferably in the range of from 4 to 12.

Preferable specific examples of the coupler represented by any of formula (I), (II) and (III) according to the present invention are shown below. However, the present invention is not limited to these compounds. Herein, the present invention also embraces tautomers, in which the hydrogen atom at the coupling site (the hydrogen atom on the carbon atom to which X₁ is substituting) is transferred on the nitrogen atom in the C═N portion bonding to the coupling site (the ring-constituting nitrogen atom that is not bonded with R_1a).

In the following explanation, when the exemplified compounds shown above are referred to, they are expressed as “coupler (x)”, with using the number X labeled to each of the exemplified compounds in the parenthesis.

Next, the compound represented by formula (Ia) for use in the present invention, preferably in the second embodiment of the present invention, is explained in detail. In the present specification, the compound is also referred to as a yellow dye-forming coupler.

In formula, R_11a represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 4 to 8 carbon atoms. As the substituent that R_11a may have, those atoms and groups set forth as the substituent of the above-mentioned R_1a, can be mentioned.

The above-mentioned substituent may be further substituted with another substituent. As the another substituent, there are those atoms and groups set forth as the substituent of the above-mentioned R_1a (hereinafter sometimes also referred to simply as “the substituent of R_11a”).

R_11a is preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group having 4 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably n-butyl group.

In formula (Ia), Qa represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N((CH₂)₃O—R_11a)—. (Qa has substantially the same meaning as Q in formula (I), though literal expression of Qa is different from that of Q in formula (I).) Preferred examples of Qa include rings and groups exemplified as Q in formula (I).

In formula (Ia), R_2a has the same meaning as described in formula (I). Preferable range thereof is also the same.

In formula (Ia), however, the total of carbon atoms of R_2a is preferably in the range of from 0 to 60, more preferably in the range of from 0 to 50, and furthermore preferably in the range of from 0 to 40.

In formula (Ia), R_2a is more preferably a t-alkyl group, furthermore preferably a t-butyl group, and most preferably a t-butyl group in the para-position to the —SR_14a.

In formula (Ia), m_a represents an integer of from 0 to 4. When m_a is 2 or more, a plurality of R₂ as may be the same or different from each other, and they may bond to each other to form a ring. In view of the effects of the present invention, ma is preferably 0 or 1.

In formula (Ia), R_14a represents a primary alkyl group that may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent are the atoms and groups set forth above as the substituent of R_11a. A preferable carbon number of R_14a including its substituent is in the range of from 3 to 30, more preferably in the range of from 3 to 20, and furthermore preferably in the range of from 6 to 12. As the substituent, preferred are an alkyl group and an aryl group, more preferably an alkyl group. R_14a is most preferably a 2-ethylhexyl group.

The term “primary alkyl group” in this specification is used to mean that, taking, in the carbon skeleton of the alkyl group, the carbon atom bonding to S in formula (Ia) as a central carbon, the central carbon has at least two hydrogen atoms.

In formula (Ia), X₁ has the same meaning as described in formula (I). Preferable range thereof is also the same.

In order to render the coupler immobile in the photosensitive material, at least one of Qa, R_11a, X₁ and R_2a has preferably 8 to 60 carbon atoms, more preferably 8 to 50 carbon atoms in total respectively, including carbon atoms of substituent(s) that they may have.

It is preferable, from the point of the effects of the present invention, that the compound represented by formula (Ia) is a compound represented by formula (IIa). Here, the compound represented by formula (IIa) is also referred to as a yellow dye-forming coupler. The compound represented by formula (IIa) is explained in detail below.

In formula (IIa), R_11a, R_2a, R_14a, ma, and X₁ each have the same meanings as described in formula (Ia). Preferable ranges thereof are also the same.

In formula (IIa), R_3a has the same meaning as described in formula (II). Preferable range thereof is also the same.

In formula (IIa), n has the same meaning as described in formula (II). Preferable range thereof is also the same.

Preferable specific examples of the couplers represented by formula (Ia) or (IIa) according to the present invention are shown below. However, the present invention is not limited to these compounds. Herein, the present invention also embraces tautomers, in which the hydrogen atom at the coupling site (the hydrogen atom on the carbon atom to which X₁ is substituting) is transferred on the nitrogen atom in the C═N portion bonding to the coupling site (the ring-constituting nitrogen atom that is not bonded with (CH₂)₃O—R_11a).

The following examples include, with putting new reference numbers, some of specific examples that were shown as compounds represented by any one of formulae (I), (II), and (III) in an earlier part of this specification.

In the following explanation, when the exemplified compounds shown above are referred to, they are expressed as “coupler (x)”, with using the number X labeled to each of the exemplified compounds in the parenthesis.

Specific synthetic examples of the compounds represented by the foregoing formula (I), (II), (III), (Ia) or (IIa) are described below.

SYNTHETIC EXAMPLE 1

Synthesis of Coupler (3)

Coupler (3) was synthesized according to the following synthesis route:

To a solution containing 438 g of 3-(2,4-di-t-amylphenoxy)propylamine, 210 ml of triethylamine and 1 liter of acetonitrile, under ice-cooling, 333 g of orthonitrobenzene sulfonyl chloride was added gradually with stirring. The temperature of the reaction system was elevated up to room temperature, and then, agitation was further continued for 1 hour. To the reaction mixture, ethyl acetate and water were added for separation. The organic layer was washed with dilute hydrochloric acid and saturated brine, and then dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate. Thereafter, the solvent was distilled off under a reduced pressure. Crystallization from a mixed solvent of ethyl acetate and hexane gave 588 g of compound (A-1).

To a mixture of 540 ml of isopropanol and 90 ml of water, 84.0 g of a reduced iron and 8.4 g of ammonium chloride were dispersed and heated under reflux for 1 hour. To this dispersion, 119 g of compound (A-1) was gradually added, while stirring. Further, the reaction mixture was heated under reflux for 2 hours, and then suction-filtered through celite. To the filtrate, ethyl acetate and water were added for separation. The separated organic solvent layer was washed with saturated brine and dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate. The solvent was distilled off under a reduced pressure to obtain 111 g of compound (A-2) as an oily product.

A solution of 111 g of compound (A-2), 68.4 g of a hydrochloride of imino ether (A-0) and 150 ml of ethyl alcohol was stirred for 1 hour while heating under reflux. Further, 4.9 g of a hydrochloride of imino ether was added and stirred with heating under reflux for 30 minutes. After cooling, the reaction mixture was filtered under reduced pressure. To the filtrate, 100 ml of p-xylene was added and heated under reflux for 4 hours, while eliminating ethanol by distillation. The reaction solution was purified by silica gel column chromatography using a mixed solvent of ethyl acetate and hexane as an eluent. Crystallization from methanol gave 93.1 g of compound (A-3).

A solution of 40.7 g of compound (A-3), 18.5 g of 2-methoxyaniline and 10 ml of p-xylene was stirred while heating under reflux for 6 hours. To the reaction mixture, ethyl acetate and water were added for separation. The organic solvent layer was washed with dilute hydrochloric acid and saturated brine, and then dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate. Thereafter, the solvent was distilled off under a reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography using a mixed solvent of ethyl acetate and hexane as an eluent, to obtain 37.7 g of compound (A-4) as an oily product.

To a solution containing 24.8 g of compound (A-4) and 400 ml of methylene chloride, under ice-cooling, 35 ml of a methylene chloride solution containing 2.1 ml of bromine was added dropwise. After stirring for 30 minutes while cooling on ice, methylene chloride and water were added for separation. The separated organic solvent layer was washed with saturated brine and dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate. The solvent was distilled off under a reduced pressure, to obtain a crude product of compound (A-5).

To a solution of 15.5 g of 5,5-dimethyloxazolidine-2,4-dione and 16.8 ml of triethylamine dissolved in 200 ml of N,N-dimethylacetamide, a solution of the whole quantity of the previously synthesized crude product of compound (A-5) dissolved in 40 ml of acetonitrile was added dropwise, over 10 minutes, at room temperature. After the temperature of the reaction system was elevated up to 40° C., and then, agitation was continued for 30 minutes. To the reaction solution, ethyl acetate and water were added to conduct separation. The separated organic layer was washed with a 0.1 normal aqueous solution of potassium hydroxide, dilute hydrochloric acid and saturated brine, and then dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate. The solvent was eliminated by vacuum distillation. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography using a mixed solvent of acetone and hexane as an eluent. Crystallization from a mixed solvent of ethyl acetate and hexane gave 23.4 g of coupler (3).

SYNTHESIS EXAMPLE 2

Synthesis of Coupler (6) (Synthesis of Coupler (102))

Coupler (6) was synthesized according to the following synthesis rout.

To a solution containing 181.2 g of 3-butoxypropylamine, 198.2 ml of triethylamine and 840 ml of toluene, 300.0 g of orthonitrobenzene sulfonyl chloride was added gradually with stirring while ice-cooling. After the temperature of the reaction system was elevated up to room temperature, agitation was further continued for 1 hour. To the reaction solution, 50 ml of hydrochloric acid and 750 ml of water were added for separation. The separated organic layer was washed with an aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate, to obtain a reaction solution of compound (B-1).

To a mixture of 8.5 g of 10% Pd/C and 50 ml of water, the previously prepared reaction solution of compound (B-1) and 100 ml of toluene were added, and then 165 g of 80% hydrazine hydrate and 50 ml of water were added dropwise over 1 hour at 40° C. Thereafter, the reaction solution was further stirred for 1 hour at 45° C., and then filtered through celite. The reaction mixture was washed with 350 ml of toluene, 500 ml of isopropanol and 1.5 liter of water. After separation, the organic layer was washed twice with 500 ml of water, to obtain a reaction solution of compound (B-2). Thereafter, 800 ml of the solvent was eliminated by vacuum concentration. To the resulting residue, 400 ml of toluene, 305.7 g of ethyl 3,3-diethoxyacrylate and 2.6 g of p-toluene sulfonic acid monohydrate were added, and stirred at 85° C. for 30 minutes. Further, 13.8 g of 90% sodium ethoxide was added, and then the mixture was stirred with heating at 120° C. for 4 hours. After cooling, 25 ml of hydrochloric acid and 500 ml of water were added for separation. Further, 50 g of p-toluene sulfonic acid monohydrate and 500 ml of water were added for washing. Thereafter, the solvent was eliminated by concentration under reduced pressure. To the resulting residue, 600 ml of methanol and 30 ml of water were added for crystallization. Further, 100 ml of methanol and 110 ml of water were added dropwise, and the mixture was cooled to 0° C. The resulting precipitate was collected by filtration under reduced pressure, and then washed with a mixed solvent of methanol/water, to obtain 440.1 g of Compound (B-3).

To a mixture of 343 g of 2-ethylhexanethiol, 800 ml of N,N-dimethyl acetamide and 364 g of potassium carbonate, 470 g of 4-t-butyl-2-nitrochlorobenzene was added under a nitrogen atmosphere, and stirred with heating, at 90° C., for 2 hours. Thereafter, the reaction mixture was poured into 1000 ml of ice water, and then extracted with 1000 ml of ethyl acetate. The separated organic solvent layer was washed twice with saturated brine, and dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate. After separating magnesium sulfate by filtration, the solvent was distilled off under a reduced pressure, to obtain 806 g of compound (B-4) as an oily product.

To a mixture of 2200 ml of isopropanol and 370 ml of water, 740 g of a reduced iron and 74.0 g of ammonium chloride were dispersed, and stirred with heating under reflux, for 1 hour. To this dispersion, 806 g of compound (B-4) was gradually added. Further, the reaction mixture was stirred with heating under reflux for 2 hours, and then suction-filtered through celite. To the filtrate, ethyl acetate and water were added for separation. The separated organic solvent layer was washed with saturated brine, and dried with anhydrous magnesium sulfate. The solvent was distilled off under a reduced pressure, to obtain 671 g of compound (B-5) as an oily product.

A mixture of 110 g of compound (B-3) and 84.5 g of compound (B-5) was stirred with heating, at the temperature of 145 to 150° C. for 6 hours, under a reduced pressure, to obtain a crude product of compound (B-6). To the reaction crude product, 750 ml of toluene was added, and then 41.2 g of 1,3-dibromo-5,5-dimethylhydantoin was added, with stirring, over 15 minutes, while ice-cooling. After stirring at room temperature for 1 hour, water was added for separation. The separated organic layer was washed with water, to obtain a reaction solution of compound (B-7).

To a mixture of 39.0 g of 5,5-dimethyloxazolidine-2,4-dione, 41.8 g of potassium carbonate and 150 ml of N,N-dimethylacetamide, the whole quantity of the previously synthesized reaction solution of compound (B-7) was added dropwise, over 30 minutes, at room temperature with stirring. Thereafter, the temperature of the reaction system was elevated up to 50° C., and agitation was continued for 2 hours. After separation, the separated organic layer was washed with a 0.1 normal aqueous solution of potassium hydroxide; dilute hydrochloric acid, and saturated brine. The solvent was eliminated by vacuum distillation. Crystallization from a methanol solvent gave 171.6 g of coupler (6).

Other dye-forming couplers can be also synthesized according to the above-mentioned method, or according to the method described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,455,149.

In the silver halide photographic photosensitive material of the present invention, the quantity of the coupler represented by formula (I), (II), (III), (Ia) or (IIa) in the photosensitive material is preferably in the range of from 0.01 g to 10 g, more preferably in the range of from 0.1 g to 2 g, per m² of the photosensitive material. The quantity of the coupler in a photosensitive emulsion layer is preferably in the range of from 1×10⁻³ mole to 1 mole, and more preferably in the range of from 2×10⁻³ mole to 3×10⁻¹ mole, per mole of silver halide in the same photosensitive emulsion layer.

In the present invention, the dye-forming couplers represented by formula (I), (II), (III), (Ia) or (IIa) are preferably used in a silver halide emulsion layer, or layers adjacent thereto. A silver halide emulsion layer is particularly preferred.

The compound represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) for use in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, is explained in detail below.

First, each group usable in the magenta dye-forming couplers represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) is explained.

Specific examples for each of the groups are set forth below. Specific examples of the group corresponding to the each group that is in any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) are also the same as described below. These specific examples of the group are applied to groups of other formulae than the magenta couplers, unless otherwise mentioned in particular.

An alkyl group (for example, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, (t)-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, octyl, dodecyl), a cycloalkyl group (for example, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl), an alkenyl group (for example, vinyl, allyl), an alkynyl group (for example, propargyl), an aryl group (for example, phenyl, naphthyl), a heterocyclic group (this is also referred to as a hetero-ring group; for example, pyridyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, imidazolyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, selenazolyl, sulforanyl, piperidinyl, pyrazolyl, tetrazolyl), a halogen atom (for example, chlorine, bromine, iodine, fluorine), an alkoxy group (this is also referred to as an alkyloxy group; for example, methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, pentyloxy, hexyloxy, octyloxy, dodecyloxy), a cycloalkoxy group (for example, cyclopentyloxy, cyclohexyloxy), an aryloxy group (for example, phenoxy, naphthyloxy), a heterocyclic oxy group (this is also referred to as a hetero-ring oxy group; for example, pyridyloxy, furyloxy, pyrazinyloxy, pyrimidinyloxy), an alkylthio group (for example, methylthio, ethylthio, propylthio, pentylthio, hexylthio, octylthio, dodecylthio), a cycloalkylthio group (for example, cyclopentylthio, cyclohexylthio), an arylthio group (for example, phenylthio, naphthylthio), an alkoxycarbonyl group (for example, methyloxycarbonyl, ethyloxycarbonyl, butyloxycarbonyl, octyloxycarbonyl, dodecyloxycarbonyl), a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group (for example, cyclopentyloxycarbonyl, cyclohexyloxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (for example, phenyloxycarbonyl, naphthyloxycarbonyl), a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group (for example, pyridyloxycarbonyl, furyloxycarbonyl, pyrazinyloxycarbonyl, pyrimidinyloxycarbonyl), a sulfamoyl group (for example, aminosulfonyl, methylaminosulfonyl, dimethylaminosulfonyl, butylaminosulfonyl, hexylaminosulfonyl, cyclohexylaminosulfonyl, octylaminosulfonyl, dodecylaminosulfonyl, phenylaminosulfonyl, naphthylaminosulfonyl, 2-pyridylaminosulfonyl), a ureido group (for example, methylureido, ethylureido, pentylureido, cyclohexylureido, octylureido, dodecylureido, phenylureido, naphthylureido, 2-pyridylaminoureido), an acyl group (for example, acetyl, ethylcarbonyl, propylcarbonyl, pentylcarbonyl, cyclohexylcarbonyl, octylcarbonyl, 2-ethylhexylcarbonyl, dodecylcarbonyl, phenylcarbonyl, naphthylcarbonyl, pyridylcarbonyl), an acyloxy group (for example, acetyloxy, ethylcarbonyloxy, butylcarbonyloxy, octylcarbonyloxy, dodecylcarbonyloxy, phenylcarbonyloxy), an amido group (this is also referred to as an acylamino group; for example, methylcarbonylamino, ethylcarbonylamino, dimethylcarbonylamino, propylcarbonylamino, pentylcarbonylamino, cyclohexylcarbonylamino, 2-ethylhexylcarbonylamino, octylcarbonylamino, dodecylcarbonylamino, phenylcarbonylamino, naphthylcarbonylamino), a carbamoyl group (for example, aminocarbonyl, methylaminocarbonyl, dimethylaminocarbonyl, propylaminocarbonyl, pentylaminocarbonyl, cyclohexylaminocarbonyl, octylaminocarbonyl, 2-ethylhexylaminocarbonyl, dodecylaminocarbonyl, phenylaminocarbonyl, naphthylaminocarbonyl, 2-pyridylaminocarbonyl), a sulfinyl group (for example, methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, butylsulfinyl, cyclohexylsulfinyl, 2-ethylhexylsufinyl, dodecylsulfinyl, phenylsulfinyl, naphthylsulfinyl, 2-pyridylsulfinyl), a sulfonyl group (for example, methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, butylsulfonyl, cyclohexylsulfonyl, 2-ethylhexylsulfonyl, dodecylsulfonyl, phenylsulfonyl, naphthylsulfonyl, 2-pyridylsulfonyl), an amino group (this group embraces an alkylamino group and an arylamino group; for example, amino, ethylamino, dimethylamino, butylamino, cyclopentylamino, 2-ethylhexylamino, dodecylamino, anilino, naphthylamino, 2-pyridylamino), a sulfonamido group (for example, methylsulfonylamino, ethylsulfonylamino, butylsulfonylamino, hexylsulfonylamino, cyclohexylsulfonylamino, octylsulfonylamino, dodecylsulfonylamino, phenylsulfonylamino).

The magenta dye-forming coupler represented by the aforementioned formula (M-I) for use in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, is explained.

In the aforementioned formula (M-I), Y₁ and Y₂ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group. Of these, preferred are a hydrogen atom, and an alkyl or alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. A hydrogen atom, and an alkyl or alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms are more preferable. Y₁ and Y₂ may be the same or different.

R₁ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents.

Of these, preferred as R₁ are an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, an amino group, and a hydroxyl group. An alkyl group, alkoxy group or amido group, having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms) is more preferable. p represents 0, 1, or 2. When p is 2, a plurality of R₁s may be the same or different. p is preferably 0 or 1.

R₂ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group.

The substituent(s) for R₂ may be selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents.

R₂ is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The substituent(s) for R₂ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, or an amido group.

X represents a halogen atom. A chlorine atom and a bromine atom are preferable. A chlorine atom is more preferable.

The magenta dye-forming coupler represented by the aforementioned formula (M-II) for use in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, is explained.

In the aforementioned formula (M-II), Y₃ and Y₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group. Of these, preferred are a hydrogen atom, and an alkyl group, alkoxy group, or aryloxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. A hydrogen atom, and an alkyl group or alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms are more preferable. Y₃ and Y₄ may be the same or different.

R₃ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. Of these, preferred as R₃ are an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, an amino group, and a hydroxyl group. An alkyl group, alkoxy group or amido group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms) is more preferable. q represents 0, 1, or 2. When q is 2, a plurality of R₃s may be the same or different. q is preferably 0 or 1.

R₄ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group. The substituent(s) for R₄ may be selected from an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₄ is preferably an alkyl group or aryl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group or aryl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms. The substituent(s) for R₄ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, or an amido group.

X represents a halogen atom. A chlorine atom and a bromine atom are preferable. A chlorine atom is more preferable.

The magenta dye-forming coupler represented by the aforementioned formula (M-III) for use in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, is explained.

In formula (M-III), L₁ represents —NR₇— or —O—. R₅ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. Of these, preferred are an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, an amino group, and a hydroxyl group. An alkyl group, alkoxy group or amido group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms) is more preferable. r represents 0, 1, or 2. When r is 2, a plurality of R₅s may be the same or different. r is preferably 0 or 1.

R₆ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group. R₇ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, alkenyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group. The substituent(s) for R₆ and R₇ each may be selected from an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₆ is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The substituent(s) for R₆ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, or an amido group. R₇ is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The substituent(s) for R₇ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, or an amido group. X represents a halogen atom. A chlorine atom and a bromine atom are preferable. A chlorine atom is more preferable.

The magenta dye-forming coupler represented by the aforementioned formula (M-IV) for use in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, is explained.

In formula (M-IV), L₂ represents —NR₁₀- or —O—. R₈ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. Of these, preferred as R₈ are an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, an amino group, and a hydroxyl group. An alkyl group, alkoxy group or amido group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms) is more preferable. s represents 0, 1, or 2. When s is 2, a plurality of R₈s may be the same or different. s is preferably 0 or 1.

R₉ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group. R₁₀ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group. The substituent(s) for R₉ and R₁₀ each may be selected from an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₉ is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The substituent(s) for R₉ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, or an amido group. R₁₀ is preferably a hydrogen atom, or an alkyl group or aryl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, or an alkyl group or aryl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms. The substituent for R₁₀ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, or an amido group. X represents a halogen atom. A chlorine atom and a bromine atom are preferable. A chlorine atom is more preferable.

The magenta dye-forming coupler represented by the aforementioned formula (M-V) for use in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, is explained.

In formula (M-V), R₁₁ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. Of these, preferred as R₁₁ are an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, an amino group, and a hydroxyl group. An alkyl group, alkoxy group or amido group, having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms) is more preferable. t represents 0, 1, or 2. When t is 2, a plurality of R₁₁s may be the same or different. t is preferably 0 or 1.

R₁₂ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₁₂ is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxycarbonyl group., an acyloxy group, or an amido group. Of these, particularly preferred are groups having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 26 carbon atoms.

R₁₃ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₁₃ is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, or an amido group. Of these, particularly preferred are groups having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 26 carbon atoms.

R₁₄ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₁₄ is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, or an amido group. Of these, particularly preferred are groups having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 26 carbon atoms. X represents a halogen atom. A chlorine atom and a bromine atom are preferable. A chlorine atom is more preferable.

The magenta dye-forming coupler represented by the aforementioned formula (M-VI) for use in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, is explained.

In formula (M-VI), R₁₅ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. Of these, preferred as R₁₅ are an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, an amino group, and a hydroxyl group. An alkyl group, alkoxy group or amido group, having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (more preferably 1 to 8 carbon atoms) is more preferable. u represents 0, 1, or 2. When u is 2, a plurality of R₁₅s may be the same or different. u is preferably 0 or 1.

R₁₆, R₁₇, and R₁₈ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₁₆, R₁₇ and R₁₈ are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, or an amido group. Of these, particularly preferred are groups having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 26 carbon atoms. X represents a halogen atom. A chlorine atom and a bromine atom are preferable. A chlorine atom is more preferable.

The magenta dye-forming coupler represented by the aforementioned formula (M-VII) for use in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, is explained.

In formula (M-VII), R₁₉ and R₂₀ each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₁₉ and R₂₀ are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, or an amido group. v and w each independently represent 0 or I, with the proviso that v and w are not 0 at the same time.

L₃ represents —NR₂₂— or —O—. X represents 0 or 1. R₂₁ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group. R₂₂ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group. The substituent(s) for R₂, and R₂₂ may be selected from an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₂₁ is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The substituent(s) for R₂₁ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, or a hydroxyl group, more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, or an amido group. R₂₂ is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The substituent(s) for R₂₂ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, or a hydroxyl group, more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, or an amido group. x represents a halogen atom. A chlorine atom and a bromine atom are preferable. A chlorine atom is more preferable.

The magenta dye-forming coupler represented by the aforementioned formula (M-VIII) for use in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, is explained.

In the aforementioned formula (M-VIII), R₂₃ and R₂₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group. R₂₃ and R₂₄ are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. L₄ represents a divalent linking group selected from —(C═O)—, —(C═O)—O—, —O—(C═O)—, —(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —O—(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—, —SO—, —SO₂—, and —NR₂₇—. L₄ is preferably —(C═O)—, —(C═O)—O—, —O—(C═O)—, —(C═O)—NR₂₇—, —NR₂₇—(C═O)—, or —NR₂₇—(C═O)—NR₂₇—, and more preferably —(C═O)—, —(C═O)—O—, —O—(C═O)—, —(C═O)—NR₂₇—, or —NR₂₇—(C═O)—. R₂₅ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group. The substituent(s) for R₂₅ may be selected from an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₂₅ is preferably an alkyl group or aryl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably an alkyl group or aryl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms. The substituents for R₂₅ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, or a hydroxyl group, more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, or an amido group.

R₂₆ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₂₆ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, or an amido group. Of these, particularly preferred are groups having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 26 carbon atoms. y represents 0, 1, or 2. When y is 2, a plurality of R₂₆s may be the same or different. y is preferably 0 or 1.

R₂₇ represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, alkenyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group. R₂₇ is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms. The substituent(s) for R₂₇ may be selected from an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₂₇ is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The substituent(s) for R₂₇ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, or a hydroxyl group, more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, or an amido group. X represents a halogen atom. A chlorine atom and a bromine atom are preferable. A chlorine atom is more preferable.

The magenta dye-forming coupler represented by the aforementioned formula (M-IX) for use in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, is explained.

In formula (M-IX), R₂₈ represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group. The substituent(s) for R₂₈ may be selected from an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₂₈ is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The substituent(s) for R₂₈ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, or a hydroxyl group, more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, or an amido group.

R₂₉ represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group. These groups may be further substituted with any of the aforementioned substituents. R₂₉ is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, or a hydroxyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, or an amido group. Of these, particularly preferred are groups having 1 to 36 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 26 carbon atoms. z represents 0, 1, or 2. When z is 2, a plurality of R₂₉s may be the same or different. z is preferably 0 or 1. X represents a halogen atom. A chlorine atom and a bromine atom are preferable. A chlorine atom is more preferable.

The magenta dye-forming coupler represented by the aforementioned formula (M-X) for use in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, is explained.

R₃₁ represents a tertiary alkyl group. The tertiary alkyl group may have a substituent, and branched alkyl groups thereof may bond with each other to form a ring. As the substituent(s), preferred are, for example, a halogen atom, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkylcarbonyloxy group, an arylcarbonyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbonamido group, a sulfonamido group, a carboxyl group, and a cyano group. Examples of R₃₁ in which branched alkyl groups bond with each other to form a ring, include 1-methyl cyclopropyl group, 1-ethyl cyclopropyl group, and adamantyl group. R₃₁ is most preferably a t-butyl group. R₃₂ and R₃₃ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent. As the substituent, preferred are, for example, a cyano group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, and a sulfamoyl group. In the present invention, it is preferred that R₃₂ is a hydrogen atom, and R₃₃ is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an alkoxy group. Most preferably both R₃₂ and R₃₃ are hydrogen atoms at the same time.

R₃₄ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group. The term “alkyl group” herein is used to mean a substituted or unsubstituted and straight or branched chain alkyl group. Examples of the substituent(s) of the substituted alkyl group include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, a carboxyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an oxycarbonyl group, an carbonyloxy group, a carbonamido group, a sulfonamido group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an imido group (for example, succinimido, phthalimido, hexadecylsuccinimido, octadecylsuccinimido), a urethane group (for example, methylurethane, ethylurethane, dodecylurethane, phenylurethane), a ureido group, and a sulfonyl group. The term “aryl group” herein is used to mean a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group. The substituent(s) of the substituted aryl group has the same meanings as “the substituent(s) of the substituted alkyl group” explained with respect to the aforementioned substituent R₃₄. R₃₅ represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylamino group or an arylamino group. The term “alkyl group” herein is used to mean a substituted or unsubstituted and straight or branched chain alkyl group. Examples of the substituent(s) of this substituted alkyl group has the same meanings as “the substituent(s) of the substituted alkyl group” explained with respect to the aforementioned substituent R₃₄. As the alkyl group, a substituted alkyl group, or a straight or branched chain unsubstituted alkyl group having at least 14 carbon atoms are preferable from the viewpoint of solubility to organic solvents. Of these alkyl groups, substituted alkyl groups are more preferable, and substituted alkyl groups having the total of carbon atoms of 14 or more are further more preferable. As the examples of the substituent(s) of this substituted alkyl group, preferred are an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a carbonamido group, a urethane group, a ureido group, an imido group, a sulfonamido group and a sulfonyl group. Particularly an alkoxycarbonyl group is preferable.

The term “aryl group” of R₃₅ herein is used to mean a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group. The substituent(s) of this substituted aryl group has the same meanings as “the substituent(s) of the substituted alkyl group” explained with respect to the aforementioned substituent R₃₄. The term “alkoxy group” of R₃₅ herein is used to mean a substituted or unsubstituted and straight or branched chain alkyloxy group. Examples of the substituent(s) of the substituted alkyloxy group has the same meanings as “the substituent(s) of the substituted alkyl group” explained with respect to the aforementioned substituent R₃₄. The term “alkylamino group” of R₃₅ herein is used to mean a substituted or unsubstituted and straight or branched chain alkylamino group. Examples of the substituent(s) of the substituted alkylamino group has the same meanings as “the substituent(s) of the substituted alkyl group” explained with respect to the aforementioned substituent R₃₄. The term “arylamino group” of R₃₅ herein is used to mean a substituted or unsubstituted arylamino group. The substituent(s) of the substituted arylamino group has the same meanings as “the substituent(s) of the substituted alkyl group” explained with respect to the aforementioned substituent R₃₄. As R₃₅, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group and an alkylamino group are preferred from the viewpoint of solubility. An alkyl group, an aryl group and an alkoxy group are more preferred from the easiness of synthesis. Particularly an alkyl group is preferable. A and B each represent —CO— or —SO₂—. α represents 0 or 1. A is preferably —CO— because the maximum absorption wavelength of a dye formed upon a coupling reaction with an oxidation product of a developing agent is short. R₃₄ and R₃₅ may bond with each other to form a 5- to 7-membered ring. Typical examples of the 5- to 7-membered ring are shown below. However, the present invention is not limited to these rings.

The 5- to 7-membered ring may have a substituent substitutive on the ring, such as those described in the aforementioned R₃₂ and R₃₃. When R₃₄ and R₃₅ bond with each other to form a ring, an imido ring and a lactam ring are preferable as the ring. However, it is more preferable that R₃₄ and R₃₅ do not bond with each other. α is preferably 0. It is most preferred that a is 0 and R₃₄ is a hydrogen atom. X represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an aryloxy group. In the coupler for use in the present invention, the X that is a halogen atom, or an aryloxy group, leaves upon a coupling reaction with an oxidation product of a developing agent. As the halogen atom, there are fluorine, chlorine and bromine atoms. The term “aryloxy group” herein is used to mean a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group. The substituent(s) of the substituted aryloxy group has the same meanings as “the substituent(s) of the substituted alkyl group” explained with respect to the aforementioned substituent R₃₄. Examples of the aryloxy group include a phenoxy group, a 4-methylphenoxy group, a 4-tert-butylphenoxy group, a 4-methoxycarbonyl phenoxy group, a 4-ethoxycarbonyl phenoxy group, a 4-carboxyphenoxy group, a 4-cyanophenoxy group, and a 2,4-dimethylphenoxy group. X is preferably a halogen atom, or an aryloxy group, more preferably a halogen atom, and most preferably a chlorine atom.

Specific examples of the typical magenta couplers according to the present invention are shown below. However, the present invention should not be construed as being limited to these compounds.

The magenta coupler represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) for use in the present invention can be synthesized by methods described in JP-A-60-197688, JP-A-3-184980, JP-A-6-43611, or JP-A-2001-356455, or methods according to these methods.

The amount of the magenta coupler represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) for use in the present invention is preferably in the range of from 0.001 g to 3.0 g, more preferably in the range of from 0.01 g to 1.0 g, per m of the photosensitive material. Particularly in case of the reflection type photosensitive material, the amount is preferably in the range of from 0.01 g to 0.8 g, more preferably in the range of from 0.02 g to 0.6 g, per m of the photosensitive material. In the present invention, the magenta coupler represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) is preferably used in a silver halide emulsion layer or layers adjacent to the emulsion layer, particularly preferably in a silver halide emulsion layer. The magenta coupler, when used in the silver halide emulsion layer, is preferably used in the range of from 0.001 to 10 mole, more preferably in the range of from 0.05 to 2 mole, per mole of silver halide.

Next, the compound represented by formula (Ph) for use in the present invention is explained in detail below. This compound can be particularly preferably used in the first and second embodiments of the present invention.

In formula (Ph), R_b1 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group (this group is also referred to as an amido group), a carbonyl group (this group is also referred to as an acyl group), or a sulfonyl group. R_b2, R_b3, R_b4 and R_b5 each represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.

The compound represented by formula (Ph) is explained in more detail below.

R_b1 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group. Further, each of these groups may be further substituted with other substituent(s). The above aliphatic group is a general term embracing an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, a cycloalkyl group, a cycloalkenyl group and a cycloalkynyl group, and examples of the aliphatic group include a methyl group, an ethyl group, an i-propyl group, a t-butyl group, a t-octyl group, and a cyclohexyl group. Examples of the aryl group include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group, each of which may have a substituent. Examples of the carbamoyl group include a N,N-diethylcarbamoyl group, a N,N-dibutylcarbamoyl group, a hexylcarbamoyl group, and a N,N-diphenylcarbamoyl group. Examples of the acylamino group include a butylamido group, a hexylamido group, an octylamido group, and a benzamido group. As a carbonyl group, an oxycarbonyl group is preferable, and examples of the carbonyl group include a hexyloxycarbonyl group, an octyloxycarbonyl group, and a dodecyloxycarbonyl group. Examples of the sulfonyl group include a butylsulfonyl group, an octylsulfonyl group, and a dodecylsulfonyl group.

R_b2, R_b3, R_b4 and R_b5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (for example, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine), a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group (for example, methyl, ethyl, butyl, allyl), an aryl group (for example, phenyl, naphthyl), a heterocyclic group (for example, piperidyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl), an aliphatic oxy group (for example, methoxy, octyloxy, cyclohexyloxy), an aryloxy group (for example, phenoxy, naphthoxy), a heterocyclic oxy group (for example, piperidyloxy, pyrrolyloxy, indolyloxy), an oxycarbonyl group (preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, for example, methoxycarbonyl, hexadecyloxycarbonyl, phenoxycarbonyl, p-chlorophenoxycarbonyl), an acyl group (for example, acetyl, pivaloyl, methacryloyl), an acyloxy group (for example, acetoxy, benzoyloxy), an oxycarbonyloxy group (preferably an alkoxycarbonyloxy group or an aryloxycarbonyloxy group, for example, methoxycarbonyloxy, octyloxycarbonyloxy, phenoxycarbonyloxy), a carbamoyl group (for example, N,N-dimethylcarbamoyl, N,N-diethylcarbamoyl, diphenylcarbamoyl, hexylcarbamoyl), an acylamino group (for example, heptylamido, undecylamido, pentadecylamido, 1-hexylnonylamido), a sulfonyl group (including an aliphatic sulfonyl group and an arylsulfonyl group, for example, methane sulfonyl, butane sulfonyl, octane sulfonyl, benzene sulfonyl, p-toluene sulfonyl), a sulfinyl group (for example, methane sulfinyl, octane sulfinyl, benzene sulfinyl, p-toluene sulfinyl), a sulfamoyl group (for example, dimethylsulfamoyl), an alkylthio group (for example, methylthio, octylthio, dodecylthio), or an arylthio group (for example, phenylthio). Further, R_b1 to R_b5 each may be a linking group that links at least two phenol skeletons (mother nuclei).

Each of the aforementioned groups may be further substituted with a substituent.

As R_b1, an alkyl group, a carbonyl group and an acylamino group are preferable. An alkyl group is more preferable of all. A methyl group is particularly preferred. As R_b2, an acylamino group, an aliphatic oxy group and an alkylene-linking group are preferable. In the case of the alkylene-linking group, it is preferred that two phenol skeletons are linked via the linking group.

Preferable structures of the compounds represented by formula (Ph) are shown below.

The compounds represented by formula (Ph-1) are explained in detail below.

R_b6 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an amino group, or an acyl group. R_b1 has the same meaning as defined in formula (Ph) and the same preferable range as described above with respective to the R_b1. R_b7, R_b8 and Rbg each independently have the same meanings as R_b2 to R_b5 defined in formula (Ph) and the same preferable ranges as described above with respective to the R_b2 to R_b5.

Each of the aforementioned groups may be further substituted with a substituent.

Specific examples set forth with respect to the groups in formulae (M-I) to (M-X) may be applied to specific examples of each of groups of an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group and a sulfonyl group, each of which is represented by R_b1.

Preferably, R_b6 represents an aliphatic group (for example, 1-ethylpentyl, 1-hexylnonyl, undecyl, dodecyl, pentadecyl, heptadecyl), an aryl group, an amino group, or an acyl group.

R_b6 is preferably an aliphatic group, more preferably an unsubstituted aliphatic group, and especially preferably a branched aliphatic group. The total of carbon atoms in R_b6 is preferably in the range of from 8 to 25, especially preferably in the range of from 12 to 20. R_b1 is preferably an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, or an oxycarbonyl group, more preferably an aliphatic group, and especially preferably a methyl group. R_b7, R_b8 and R_b9 each are preferably a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group, especially preferably a hydrogen atom.

The compounds represented by formula (Ph-2) are explained in detail below. These compounds are preferable for use especially in the first and second embodiments of the present invention.

R_b1 has the same meaning as defined in formula (Ph) and the same preferable range as described above with respective to the R_b1 in formula (Ph). R_b10 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (for example, butyl, benzyl), an acyl group (for example, acryloyl, 1-methylacryloyl, 2-methylacryloyl), an oxycarbonyl group (for example, methoxycarbonyl, butoxycarbonyl, phenoxycarbonyl), a silyl group, or a phosphoryl group. X_b represents an alkylene-linking group (for example, methylene, ethylene, propylene, isopropylmethylene, pentylmethylene), a phenylene-linking group (for example, phenylene), an —O— linking group, or a —S— linking group. R_b11 to R_b16 each independently have the same meaning as R_b2 to R_b5 defined in formula (Ph) and the same preferable ranges as described above with respective to each of them.

From the viewpoint of improvement in fastness to light, R_b10 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an acyl group or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an acyl group. It is especially preferred from the viewpoint of improvement in fastness to light that R_b10 is a hydrogen atom. However, if R_b10 is a hydrogen atom, the compound represented by formula (Ph-2) itself reacts with an oxidation product of a paraphenylene diamine to develop a cyan color, thereby causing a color mixing, which is not preferable. Therefore, from this aspect, it is not most preferred that R_b10 is a hydrogen atom. X_b is preferably an alkylene-linking group, more preferably —CHR_b21 (R_b21 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or an aryl group). R_b21 is especially preferably an aliphatic group. R_b11 and R_b14 each are preferably an aliphatic group, more preferably an aliphatic group having 6 or less carbon atoms, and especially preferably a methyl group.

R_b1 is preferably an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, or an oxycarbonyl group, more preferably an aliphatic group, and especially preferably a methyl group. R_b12, R_b13, R_b15 and R_b16 each are preferably a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom.

The compounds represented by formula (Ph-3) are explained in detail below.

R_b17 and R_b18 each independently represent an aliphatic group, or an aryl group. R_b1 has the same meaning as defined in formula (Ph) and the same preferable range as described above with respective to the R_b1. R_b19 and R_b20 each have the same meanings as R_b2 to R_b5 defined in formula (Ph) and the same preferable ranges as described above with respective to each of them.

Preferably, R_b17 and R_b18 each independently represent an aliphatic group (for example, 1-ethylhexyl, 1-hexyldecyl, dodecyl, tetradecyl, hexadecyl, octadecyl), or an aryl group.

Specific examples set forth with respect to the groups in formulae (M-I) to (M-X) may be applied to specific examples of each of these groups.

R_b17 and R_b18 each are preferably an aliphatic group. R_b19 and R_b20 each are preferably a hydrogen atom or an aliphatic group, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom. R_b1 is preferably a carbamoyl group, an oxycarbonyl group or an aliphatic group, especially preferably a carbamoyl group or an oxycarbonyl group.

In the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, of these compounds represented by formula (Ph-1) or formula (Ph-3), those represented by formula (Ph-4) are particularly preferred.

The compounds represented by formula (Ph-4) are explained in detail below.

In formula (Ph-4), R_b21 represents a straight-chain, branched or cyclic, saturated or unsaturated, unsubstituted aliphatic group, or a straight-chain, branched or cyclic, saturated or unsaturated aliphatic group substituted with a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, —SR_b30, —CONR_b30R_b31, —CO₂R_b30, or —OCOR_b30. R_b30 and R_b31 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a straight-chain, branched or cyclic, saturated or unsaturated, unsubstituted aliphatic group. Examples of the straight-chain unsubstituted aliphatic group include a heptyl group, a nonyl group, a undecyl group, a dodecyl group, a pentadecyl group, a heptadecyl group, an octadecyl group, an icosyl group, a henicosyl group, a tricosyl group, a 8-heptadecel group, 8,11-heptadecadienyl group, and 8,11,14-heptadecatrienyl group. Examples of the branched aliphatic group include a t-butyl group, a t-pentyl group, a t-propylbutyl group, a 1-ethylpentyl group, and 1-hexylnonyl group. Examples of the cyclic aliphatic group include a cyclohexyl group, a cyclooctyl group, a dicyclohexylmethyl group, a (4-methyl)cyclohexylmethyl group, an adamantly group, a norbornenyl group, and a 1-(3-methyl)hexyl-5-methylnonyl group.

Examples of the halogen atom with which the aliphatic group of R_b21 may be substituted, include fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine atoms. Examples of the aliphatic group substituted with a halogen atom, include a perfluorononyl group, a 8,9-dichloroheptadecyl group, 1-chloro-1-hexylnonyl group, 1-bromoheptyl group, 1-bromopropadecyl group, and 1-bromo-1-hexylnonyl group. Examples of the aliphatic group substituted with a hydroxyl group, include a 9-hydroxynonyl group, 15-hydroxypentadecyl group, and 11-hydroxyheptapentyl group. Examples of the aliphatic group substituted with —SR_b30, include a 2-dodecylthioethyl group, a 1-hexyl-1-methylthiononyl group, 1-t-octylthiopentyl group, a 1-methylthiopropadecyl group, and 1-t-butylthio-1-hexylnonyl group. Examples of the aliphatic group substituted with —CONR_b30R_b31, include a 1-(N,N-dibutyl)carbamoyl butyl group, a 3-(N,N-dibutyl)carbamoyl-1-methylpropyl group, a 1-carbamoylmethyl heptadecyl group, and a 2-(N,N-dibutyl)carbamoylcyclohexyl group. Examples of the aliphatic group substituted with —CO₂R_b30 include a 2-dodecyloxycarbonyl-1-methylethyl group, and a 1-dodecyl-2-methoxy carbonylethyl group. Examples of the aliphatic group substituted with —OC(═O)R_b30 include a dodecylcarbonyloxyethyl group and a 2-acetyloxy-1-dodecylethyl group. Double 2-acylamino-p-cresol mother skeletons may hold a single aliphatic group in common.

The total of carbon atoms in R_b21 is preferably in the range of 8 to 25, particularly preferably in the range of 12 to 20. If the total of carbon atoms is too few, an inhibitor tends to easily come out of an oil layer dispersed together with a coupler, so that the inhibitor becomes difficult to exert its effect. In contrast, if the total of carbon atoms is too many, when the inhibitor is added in an equivalent molar amount, the resulting increase in volume makes it difficult to form a thin layer, and the inhibitor tends to hardly dissolve into the above oil layer in which a coupler is co-dispersed.

Further, as the kind of preferable aliphatic groups, an unsubstituted aliphatic group is preferred from the viewpoint of an excellent fade-preventing capability. Of these aliphatic groups, a straight-chain, or branched aliphatic group is more preferable, and a branched aliphatic group is particularly preferred. Among the branched aliphatic groups, an aliphatic group branching at its α-position is particularly preferable.

Preferable specific examples of the compounds represented by formula (Ph) for use in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these compounds.

The compound represented by formula (Ph) for use in the present invention may be used solely or in combination with two or more kinds of these compounds. Further, the layer to which the compound represented by formula (Ph) for use in the present invention is added may be different from, or identical to a layer incorporating therein a dye-forming coupler for use in the present invention. It is preferred that the compound represented by formula (Ph) and the dye-forming coupler for use in the present invention are added to the identical layer. In this connection, however, at least one compound represented by formula (Ph) for use in the present invention is added to the layer incorporating therein the dye-forming coupler represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) or the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) for use in the present invention.

The compound represented by formula (Ph) for use in the present invention, if used in combination with the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) or the magenta dye-forming coupler represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X), enables to inhibit discoloration, thereby to improve image fastness after processing.

The addition amount of the compound represented by formula (Ph) for use in the present invention is preferably in the range of from 10 mole % to 200 mole %, more preferably in the range of from 20 mole % to 150 mole %, especially preferably in the range of from 40 mole % to 120 mole %, to the dye-forming coupler, respectively.

Next, a concrete synthesis example of the compounds represented by formula (Ph) is shown below.

SYNTHETIC EXAMPLE

Synthesis of (A-22)

To 28.7 g (0.233 mole) of 2-amino-p-cresol and 38.6 g (0.460 mole) of sodium bicarbonate, 126 ml of acetonitrile was added and 63.2 g (0.23 mole) of isopalmitinic acid chloride was added dropwise over 30 minutes with heating and stirring. After additional heating and stirring for 1 hour, 100 ml of methanol was added thereto. The resulting insoluble residue was separated by filter and washed with 100 ml of methanol. To the thus-obtained solution, 50 ml of water was added dropwise over 25 minutes with stirring at room temperature for crystallization. Further stirring was continued for 2 hours with water-cooling. The precipitated crystals were separated by filter and washed with 250 ml of methanol/water=5/1, and further washed with 250 ml of water. The thus-obtained crystals were dried at 45° C. for 1 day by means of a blast drier. 80.5 g of white crystals were obtained. Yield: 96.8%, Melting point: 82 to 84° C.

Other compounds can also be synthesized in the similar manner as in the method set forth above.

The compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1), (E-2), and (E-3) are explained in detail below.

In formulae (E-1), (E-2), and (E-3), R₄₁ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an arylsulfonyl group, a phosphoryl group, or a group —Si(R₄₇)(R₄₈)(R₄₉) in which R₄₇, R₄₈ and R₄₉ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group. R₄₂ to R₄₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent. Ra₁, Ra₂, Ra₃, and Ra₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group (for example, methyl, ethyl). Preferable specific examples of each group are the same as those set forth in the explanation of formulae (M-I) to (M-X).

With respect to the compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3), the groups that are preferred from the viewpoint of the effect obtained by the present invention, are explained below.

In formulae (E-1) to (E-3), it is preferred that R₄₁ represents an aliphatic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, or a phosphoryl group, and R₄₂, R₄₃, R₄₅ and R₄₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an acylamino group. It is more preferred that R₄₁ represents an aliphatic group, and R₄₂, R₄₃, R₄₅ and R₄₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group.

Preferable specific examples of the compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) for use in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these compounds.

The addition amount of the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) that can be preferably used in the present invention, is preferably in the range of from 10 mole % to 100 mole %, more preferably in the range of from 20 mole % to 80 mole %, especially preferably in the range of from 30 mole % to 60 mole %, to the dye-forming coupler, respectively.

The compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) can be synthesized by the methods described in JP-A-53-17729, JP-A-53-20327, JP-A-54-145530, JP-A-55-21004, and JP-A-56-159644, or according to these methods.

The compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1), (E-2) and (E-3) for use in the present invention may be used solely or in combination with two or more kinds of the compounds. Further, in the photosensitive material containing the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I), the layer to which the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) for use in the present invention is added may be different from, or identical to a layer incorporating therein the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I). It is preferred that the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) and the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) for use in the present invention are added to the identical layer.

The above compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) for use in the present invention, if used in combination with the compound represented by formula (I) and the compound represented by formula (Ph) mentioned above, enables to further improve image fastness after processing.

Further, in the photosensitive material containing the dye-forming coupler represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X), the layer to which the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) is added may be different from, or identical to a layer incorporating therein the dye-forming coupler represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X). It is preferred that the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) and the dye-forming coupler represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) for use in the present invention are added to the identical layer.

Next, a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), a metal complex, a ultraviolet ray absorbing agent, and a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, each of which can be preferably used in the present invention, are explained in detail below.

In the present invention, preferably in the first embodiment of the present invention, in addition to the combination use of the compound represented by formula (TS-II) and the compound represented by formula (Ph), it is also preferable to further use:

• (i) the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3); and/or
• (ii) at least one selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by formula (TS-I), (TS-III), (TS-IV), (TS-V), (TS-VI) or (TS-VII), a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, and a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer.

Further, in the present invention, preferably in the second embodiment of the present invention, in addition to the use of the compound represented by formula (Ph), it is also preferable to further use:

• (i) the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3); and/or
• (ii) at least one selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, and a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer.

First, the compounds represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII) are explained in detail below.

The compound represented by formula (TS-I) is described in more detail.

In formula (TS-I), R₅₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, i-propyl, s-butyl, dodecyl, methoxyethyl, allyl, benzyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, p-methoxyphenyl), a heterocyclic group (e.g., 2-tetrahydrofuryl, pyranyl), an acyl group (e.g., acetyl, pivaroyl, benzoyl, acryloyl), an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl, hexadecyloxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (e.g., phenoxycarbonyl, p-methoxy phenoxycarbonyl), an aliphatic sulfonyl group (e.g., methane sulfonyl, butane sulfonyl), an aryl sulfonyl group (e.g., benzene sulfonyl, p-toluene sulfonyl), a phosphoryl group (e.g., diethyl phosphoryl, diphenyl phosphoryl, diphenoxy phosphoryl), or —Si(R₅₈)(R₅₉)(R₆₀). R₅₈, R₅₉, and R₆₀, which may be the same or different from each other, each independently represent an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, benzyl, allyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aliphatic oxy group (e.g., methoxy, butoxy), or an aryloxy group (e.g., phenoxy).

X₅, represents —O— or —N(R₅₇)—, in which R₅₇ has the same meaning as R₅₁. X₅₅ represents —N═or —C(R₅₂)═, X₅₆ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₄)═, X₅₇ represents —N═ or —C(R₅₆)═. R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅, and R₅₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a substituent. As the preferable substituent exemplified are an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, t-butyl, t-hexyl, benzyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl), an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl, dodecyloxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (e.g., phenoxycarbonyl), an aliphatic sulfonyl group (e.g., methane sulfonyl, butane sulfonyl), an aryl sulfonyl group (e.g., benzene sulfonyl, p-hydroxybenzene sulfonyl), or —X₅₁—R₅₁.

However, all of R₅₁ to R₅₇ cannot simultaneously represent hydrogen atoms, respectively, and the total number of carbon atoms in each of these groups is generally 10 or more (preferably 10 to 50), and more preferably 16 or more (preferably 16 to 40).

Further, in the first and second embodiments of the present invention, the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is neither identical to the compound represented by formula (Ph) nor the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3). In other words, both the compound represented by formula (Ph) and the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) are excluded from the compound represented by formula (TS-I).

In the third embodiment of the present invention, the compound represented by formulae (TS-I) is neither identical to the compound represented by formula (Ph-1), (Ph-3) or (Ph-4), nor the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3).

The compound represented by formula (TS-I) for use in the present invention includes those compounds represented by any of, for example, formula (I) of JP-B-63-50691 (“JP-B” means examined Japanese patent publication), formula (IIIa), (IIIb), or (IIIc) of JP-B-2-37575, formula of JP-B-2-50457, formula of JP-B-5-67220, formula (IX) of JP-B-5-70809, formula of JP-B-6-19534, formula (I) of JP-A-62-227889, formula (I) or (II) of JP-A-62-244046, formula (I) or (II) of JP-A-2-66541, formula (II) or (III) of JP-A-2-139544, formula (I) of JP-A-2-194062, formula (B), (C), or (D) of JP-A-2-212836, formula (III) of JP-A-3-200758, formula (II) or (III) of JP-A-3-48845, formula (B), (C), or (D) of JP-A-3-266836, formula (I) of JP-A-3-969440, formula (I) of JP-A-4-330440, formula (I) of JP-A-5-297541, formula of JP-A-6-130602, formula (1), (2), or (3) of International Patent Application Publication WO 91/11749, formula (I) of German Patent Publication DE4,008,785A1, formula (II) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,931,382, formula (a) of European Patent No. 203,746B1, formula (I) of European Patent No. 264,730B1, and formula (III) of JP-A-62-89962. These compounds can be synthesized according to the methods described in these publications, or general methods described in Shin Jikken Kagaku Koza, Vol. 14 (Maruzen Co., Ltd.) (1977, 1978).

From the viewpoint of the effects of the present invention, the compound represented by formula (TS-I) is preferably any of those compounds represented by any one of formulae (TS-ID), (TS-IE), (TS-IF), (TS-IG), and (TS-1H) shown below.

In formulae (TS-ID) to (TS-1H), R₅₁, R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₄, R₅₅, R₅₆, R₅₇, and X₅₁ have the same meanings as those defined in formula (TS-I). X₅₂ and X₅₃ each independently represent a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include an alkylene group, an oxy group, and a sulfonyl group. In the formulae, the same symbols in the same molecule may be the same or different in meanings.

The compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-ID) to (TS-IG) is neither identical to the compound represented by formula (Ph) nor the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3).

As to the compounds represented by any one of formulae (TS-ID) to (TS-IH), the groups thereon preferable in view of the effects of the present invention are described below.

In formula (TS-ID), preferable is the case where R₅₁ is a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, or a phosphoryl group, and R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₅, and R₅₆ each independently are a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an acyl amino group. More preferable is the case where R₅₁ is an aliphatic group, and R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₅, and R₅₆ may be the same or different, and each independently are a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group. In formulae (TS-IE), (TS-IF), and (TS-IG), preferable is the case where R₅₁ is a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, or a phosphoryl group, and R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₅, and R₅₆ each independently are a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an acyl amino group, and R₅₄ is an aliphatic group, a carbamoyl group, or an acyl amino group, and X₅₂ and X₅₃ each independently are an alkylene group or an oxy group. More preferable is the case where R₅₁ is a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an acyl group, or a phosphoryl group, and R₅₂, R₅₃, R₅₅, and R₅₆ may be the same or different, and each independently are a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an acyl amino group, and R₅₄ is an aliphatic group, or a carbamoyl group, and X₅₂ and X₅₃ each independently are —CHR₁₅₈—(R₁₅₈ is an alkyl group). In formula (TS-1H), preferable is the case where R₅₁ is an aliphatic group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group, and R₅₃ and R₅₅ each independently are an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group. More preferable is the case where R₅₁ is an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group, and R₅₃ and R₅₅ each independently are an aryloxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group.

From the point of the effects of the present invention, the compounds represented by formula (TS-I) are preferably the compounds represented by formula (TS-IE) or (TS-IG).

The compound represented by formula (TS-II) is described in detail below.

In formula (TS-II), R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃, and R₆₄ each independently are a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, preferably an alkyl group), X₆₁ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, allyl), an aliphatic oxy group (e.g., methoxy, octyloxy, cyclohexyloxy), an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl, hexadecyl oxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (e.g., phenoxycarbonyl, p-chlorophenoxycarbonyl), an acyl group (e.g., acetyl, pivaloyl, methacryloyl), an acyloxy group (e.g., acetoxy, benzoyloxy), an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group (e.g., methoxycarbonyloxy, octyloxycarbonyloxy), an aryloxycarbonyloxy group (e.g., phenoxycarbonyloxy), an aliphatic sulfonyl group (e.g., methane sulfonyl, butane sulfonyl), an aryl sulfonyl group (e.g., benzene sulfonyl, p-toluene sulfonyl), an aliphatic sulfinyl group (e.g., methane sulfinyl, octane sulfinyl), an arylsulfinyl group (e.g., benzene sulfinyl, p-toluene sulfinyl), a sulfamoyl group (e.g., dimethylsulfamoyl), a carbamoyl group (e.g., dimethylcarbamoyl, diethylcarbamoyl), a hydroxyl group, or an oxy radical group. X₆₂ represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary to form a 5- to 7-membered ring (e.g., piperidine ring, piperazine ring). The total number of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-II) is 8 or more (preferably 8 to 60).

The compound represented by formula (TS-II) for use in the present invention include those compounds represented by, for example, formula (I) of JP-B-2-32298, formula (I) of JP-B-3-39296, formula of JP-B-3-40373, formula (I) of JP-A-2-49762, formula (II) of JP-A-2-208653, formula (III) of JP-A-2-217845, formula (B) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,906,555, formula of European Patent Publication EP309,400A2, formula of European Patent Publication EP309,401A1, and formula of European Patent Publication EP309,402A1. These compounds can be synthesized according to the methods described in these publications or general methods described in Shin Jikken Kagaku Koza, Vol. 14 (Maruzen Co., Ltd.) (1977, 1978).

As to the compound represented by formula (TS-II), the groups thereon preferable from the point of the effects of the present invention are described below. From the point of the effects of the present invention, R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃ and R₆₄ each are preferably an aliphatic group, and more preferably a methyl group. From the point of the effects of the present invention, X₆₁ is preferably a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, or an oxyradical group; more preferably a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an acyl group, or an oxyradical group; and most preferably an aliphatic group, or an aliphatic oxy group. From the point of the effects of the present invention, X₆₂ forms preferably a 6-membered ring, more preferably a piperidine ring. From the point of the effects of the present invention, the compound represented by formula (TS-II) is preferably in an embodiment where R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃, and R₆₄ each are a methyl group, X₆₁ is a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an acyl group, or an oxy radical group, and X₆₂ forms a 6-membered ring; and more preferably in an embodiment where R₆₁, R₆₂, R₆₃, and R₆₄ each are a methyl group, X₆₁ is an aliphatic group, or an aliphatic oxy group, and X₆₂ forms a piperidine ring.

The amount to be added of the compound represented by formula (TS-II) for use in the present invention, preferably in the first embodiment of the present invention, is preferably 0.5 to 200 mol %, more preferably 1 to 100 mol %, especially preferably 1 to 50 mol %, to the dye-forming coupler.

The compound represented by formula (TS-III) is described in more detail below.

In formula (TS-III), R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, octyl, methoxyethyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl), an acyl group (e.g., acetyl, pivaloyl, methacryloyl), an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group (e.g., methoxycarbonyl, hexadecyl oxycarbonyl), an aryloxycarbonyl group (e.g., phenoxycarbonyl), a carbamoyl group (e.g., dimethylcarbamoyl, phenylcarbamoyl), an aliphatic sulfonyl group (e.g., methane sulfonyl, butane sulfonyl), or an aryl sulfonyl group (e.g., benzene sulfonyl). R₆₇ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, octyl, methoxyethyl), an aliphatic oxy group (e.g., methoxy, octyloxy), an aryloxy group (e.g., phenoxy, p-methoxyphenoxy), an aliphatic thio group (e.g., methylthio, octylthio), an arylthio group (e.g., phenylthio, p-methoxyphenylthio), an acyloxy group (e.g., acetoxy, pivaloyloxy), an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group (e.g., methoxycarbonyloxy, octyloxycarbonyloxy), an aryloxycarbonyloxy group (e.g., phenoxycarbonyl oxy), a substituted amino group (the substituent may be any one that is able to substitute for the hydrogen atom(s) on the amino group, e.g., amino groups substituted with a substituent such as an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group or an arylsulfonyl group), a heterocyclic group (e.g., a piperidine ring, a thiomorpholine ring), or a hydroxyl group. If possible, each combination of R₆₅ and R₆₆, R₆₆ and R₆₇, and R₆₅ and R₆₇ combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring (e.g. a morpholine ring and a pyrazolidine ring), but they never form a 2,2,6,6-tetraalkylpiperidine ring. In addition, both R₆₅ and R₆₆ are not hydrogen atoms at the same time. Further, the total number of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-III) is generally 7 or more (preferably 7 to 50).

The compound represented by formula (TS-III) for use in the present invention include compounds represented by, for example, formula (I) of JP-B-6-97332, formula (I) of JP-B-6-97334, formula (I) of JP-A-2-148037, formula (I) of JP-A-2-150841, formula (I) of JP-A-2-181145, formula (I) of JP-A-3-266836, formula (IV) of JP-A-4-350854, and formula (I) of JP-A-5-61166. These compounds can be synthesized according to the methods described in these publications or general methods described in Shin Jikken Kagaku Koza, Vol. 14 (Maruzen Co., Ltd.) (1977, 1978).

From the point of the effects of the present invention, the compounds represented by formula (TS-III) are preferably the compounds represented by any one of formulae (TS-IIIA), (TS-IIIB), (TS-IIIC), and (TS-IIID) shown below.

In formulae (TS-IIIA) to (TS-IIID), R₆₅ and R₆₆ each have the same meanings as those defined in formula (TS-III). R_e1, R_e2, R_e3 and R_e5 each independently have the same meaning as R₆₅. R_e4 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (e.g., octyl, dodecyl, 3-phenoxypropyl), or an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, 4-dodecyloxyphenyl). X₆₃ represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary, together with the —N—N—, to form a 5- to 7-membered ring, such as a pyrazolidine ring and a pyrazoline ring.

As to the compounds represented by any one of formulae (TS-IIIA) to (TS-IIID), the groups thereon preferable from the point of the effects of the present invention are described below. In formula (TS-IIIA), preferable is the case where R₆₅ and R_e1 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or an aryl group, and R₆₆ and R_e2 each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, or an acyl group; and more preferable is the case where R₆₅ and R_e2 each independently represent an aliphatic group, and R₆₆ and R_e2 each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, or an acyl group. In formula (TS-IIIB), preferable is the case where R₆₅ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, R_e3 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, or an acyl group, and X₆₃ represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary to form a 5-membered ring; and more preferable is the case where R₆₅ represents a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group, and R_e3 represents an aliphatic group, or an aryl group, and X₆₃ represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a pyrazolidine ring. In formula (TS-IIIC), preferable is the case where R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, or an aryl oxycarbonyl group, and R_e3 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or an acyl group; and more preferable is the case where R₆₅ and R₆₆ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an acyl group, or an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, and R_e3 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or an acyl group. In formula (TS-IIID), preferable is the case where R₆₅ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or a carbamoyl group, R_e5 represents an aliphatic group, or an aryl group, and R_e4 represents an aliphatic group, or an aryl group; and more preferable is the case where R₆₅ represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or a carbamoyl group, R_e5 represents an aliphatic group, or an aryl group, and R_e4 represents an aliphatic group, or an aryl group.

From the point of the effects of the present invention, the compounds represented by formula (TS-III) are more preferably those compounds represented by any one of formulae (TS-IIIB), (TS-IIIC), and (TS-IIID), and most preferably those compounds represented by formula (TS-IIIB), or (TS-IIIC).

The compound represented by formula (TS-IV) is described in more detail below.

In formula (TS-IV), R₇₁ and R₇₂ each independently represent an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, methoxycarbonylethyl, dodecyloxycarbonyl ethyl, benzyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, 4-octyloxyphenyl, 2-butoxy-5-(t)octylphenyl), or a heterocyclic group (e.g., 2-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidyl). Further, R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom, Li, Na, or K. R₇₁ and R₇₂ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring, such as a tetrahydrothiophene ring and a thiomorpholine ring. q1 represents 0, 1, or 2. In the above, the total number of carbon atoms of R₇, and R₇₂ is 10 or more, preferably 10 to 60.

The compound represented by formula (TS-IV) for use in the present invention include compounds represented by, for example, formula (I) of JP-B-2-44052, formula (T) of JP-A-3-48242, formula (A) of JP-A-3-266836, formula (I), (II) or (III) of JP-A-5-323545, formula (I) of JP-A-6-148837, formula (I) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,933,271, and formula (I) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,770,987. These compounds can be synthesized according to the methods described in these publications or general methods described in Shin Jikken Kagaku Koza, Vol. 14 (Maruzen Co., Ltd.) (1977, 1978).

From the point of the effects of the present invention, in formula (TS-IV), q1 is preferably 0 or 2. When q1 is 0, it is preferable that R₇₁ and R₇₂ each independently represent an aliphatic group, or an aryl group, or that R₇₁ and R₇₂ combine together to form a 6-membered ring. When q1 is 2, it is preferable that R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom, Na, K, an aliphatic group, or an aryl group, and R₇₂ represents an aliphatic group, or an aryl group; it is more preferable that R₇₁ represents a hydrogen atom, Na, or K, and R₇₂ represents an aryl group.

The compound represented by formula (TS-V) is described in more detail below.

In formula (TS-V), R₈₁₁ R₈₂, and R₈₃ each independently represent an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, t-octyl, allyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, 4-t-butylphenyl, 4-vinylphenyl), an aliphatic oxy group (e.g., methoxy, t-octyloxy), an aryloxy group (e.g., phenoxy, 2,4-di-t-butylphenoxy), an aliphatic amino group (e.g., butyl amino, dibutyl amino), or an arylamino group (e.g., anilino, 4-methoxyanilino, N-methylanilino), and t1 represents 0 or 1. Each combination of R₈₁ and R₈₂, and R₈₁ and R₈₃ may combine together to form a 5- to 8-membered ring. The number of total carbon atoms of R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ is 10 or more (preferably 10 to 50).

The compound represented by formula (TS-V) for use in the present invention include compounds represented by, for example, formula (I) of JP-A-3-25437, formula (I) of JP-A-3-142444, formula of U.S. Pat. No. 4,749,645, and formula of U.S. Pat. No. 4,980,275. These compounds can be synthesized according to the methods described in these publications or general methods described in Shin Jikken Kagaku Koza, Vol. 14 (Maruzen Co., Ltd.) (1977, 1978).

In formula (TS-V), from the point of the effects of the present invention, preferable is the case where t1 is 1 and R₈₁, R₈₂ and R₈₃ each independently represent an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aryloxy, or an arylamino group (more preferably at least one of R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ is an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group). Also preferable is the case where R₈₁ and R₈₂ combine together to form an 8-membered ring. More preferable is the case where t1 is 1, and R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ each independently represent an aryl group, an aliphatic oxy group, or an aryloxy group (more preferably at least one of R₈₁, R₈₂, and R₈₃ is an aryl group, or an aryloxy group).

The compound represented by formula (TS-VI) is described in more detail below.

In formula (TS-VI), R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇, and R₈₈ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent (e.g., an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryl oxycarbonyl group, a phosphoryl group, an acyl amino group, or a carbamoyl group). However, all of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇, and R₈₈ cannot simultaneously represent hydrogen atoms, respectively. Any two of R₈₅, R₈₆, R₈₇, and R₈₈ may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring (e.g., a cyclohexene ring, a cyclohexane ring), however the ring is not an aromatic ring consisting only of carbon atoms. The total number of carbon atoms of the compound represented by formula (TS-VI) is 10 or more (preferably 10 to 50).

The compound represented by formula (TS-VI) for use in the present invention include compounds represented by, for example, formula (I) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,713,317, formula (I) of JP-A-8-44017, formula (I) of JP-A-8-44018, formula (I) of JP-A-8-44019, formula (I) or (II) of JP-A-8-44020, formula (I) of JP-A-8-44021 and formula (I) or (II) of JP-A-8-44022. These compounds can be synthesized according to the methods described in these publications or general methods described in Shin Jikken Kagaku Koza, Vol. 14 (Maruzen Co., Ltd.) (1977, 1978).

From the point of the effects of the present invention, the compounds represented by formula (TS-VI) are preferably the compounds represented by any one of formulae (TS-VIA), (TS-VIB), and (TS-VIC).

In formulae (TS-VIA), (TS-VIB) and (TS-VIC), R₈₅, R₈₆, and R₈₇ each have the same meanings as defined in formula (TS-VI). R_d1 represents an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, butyl, (t-)butyl, dodecyl), an aliphatic oxy group (e.g., methoxy, butoxy, (t-)butoxy, dodecyloxy, allyloxy), an aryloxy group (e.g., phenoxy, 2,4,6-trimethylphenoxy), an aliphatic amino group (e.g., methyl amino, allyl amino, diallylamino), or an arylamino group (e.g., anilino, N-methylanilino). R_d2 and R_d3 each independently represent an alkenyl group (e.g., vinyl, allyl, oleyl). R_d4 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, allyl, vinyl, octyl), or an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, naphthyl, 4-vinylphenyl). u1 and v1 each independently represent 1, 2 or 3.

As to the compounds represented by any one of formulae (TS-VIA) to (TS-VIC), the groups thereon preferable from the point of the effects of the present invention are described below. In formula (TS-VIA), preferable is the case where R₈₅, R₈₆, and R₈₇ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group, and R_d1 is an aliphatic oxy group, an aliphatic amino group, or an arylamino group; and more preferable is the case where R₈₅, R₈₆₁ and R₈₇ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group, and R_d1 is an aliphatic oxy group, or an aliphatic amino group. In formula (TS-VIB), preferable is the case where R₈₅ is an aliphatic group or an aryl group, R_d2 is an alkenyl group, and u1 is 1, 2 or 3; and more preferable is the case where R₈₅ is an aliphatic group or an aryl group, R_d2 is an alkenyl group, and u1 is 2 or 3. In formula (TS-VIC), preferable is the case where R₈₅ is an aliphatic group or an aryl group, R_d3 is an alkenyl group, R_d4 is a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group, and v1 is 1, 2 or 3; and more preferable is the case where R₈₅ is an aliphatic group or an aryl group, R_d3 is an alkenyl group, R_d4 is a hydrogen atom, or an alkenyl group, and v1 is 2 or 3.

From the point of the effects of the present invention, the compounds represented by formula (TS-VI) are preferably the compounds represented by formula (TS-VIA) or (TS-VIB), and most preferably the compounds represented by formula (TS-VIA).

The compounds represented by formula (TS-VII) are explained below.

R₉₁ represents an aliphatic or aromatic hydrophobic group having the total number of carbon atoms of 10 or more (preferably from 10 to 50, more preferably from 10 to 32). Examples of preferable aliphatic hydrophobic groups include an alkyl group having 1 to 32 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 32 carbon atoms, an alkynyl group having 2 to 32 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 32 carbon atoms and a cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 32 carbon atoms. The above alkyl group, alkenyl group and alkynyl group each may be straight-chain or branched. Further, each of these aliphatic groups may have a substituent(s).

Examples of aromatic hydrophobic groups include an aryl group (for example, phenyl) and an aromatic heterocyclic group (for example, pyridyl, furyl). Further, each of these aromatic groups may have a substituent.

R₉₁ is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group.

As the substituent with which the aliphatic or aromatic group represented by R₉₁ may be substituted, there is no particular limitation, but as a preferable substituent, for example, there are illustrated an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an acylamino group and an amino group. An aliphatic group is more preferred.

Y₉₁ represents a monovalent organic group containing an alcoholic hydroxyl group. Y₉₁ is preferably a monovalent organic group represented by formula [AL] set forth below. Y₉₂-(L₉₂)-m₉₂-  Formula [AL]

In the formula, Y₉₂ represents a group from a compound in which a hydrogen atom is removed from at least one of hydroxyl groups in a polyhydric alcohol. L₉₂ represents a divalent linking group. m₉₂ is 0 or 1.

The polyhydric alcohol from which a hydrogen atom is removed to form a group represented by Y₉₂, is preferably glycerol, polyglycerol, pentaerythritol, trimethylolpropane, neopentylglycol, sorbitan, sorbide, sorbitol, sugars, and the like. The divalent linking group represented by L₉₂ is preferably —C(═O)— or —SO₂—.

Preferable compounds in another embodiment of the compounds represented by formula (TS-VII) are compounds in which R₉₁ represents an aliphatic group having carbon atoms of 12 or more (preferably alkyl or alkenyl groups having 12 to 32 carbon atoms) and Y₉₁ represents an OH group.

The metal complex for use in the present invention is explained below.

The metal complex for use in the present invention, is preferably those having Cu, Co, Ni, Pd, or Pt as a central metal, and more preferably those having Ni as a central metal. It is preferable that they are low in solubility to water. Specifically, the solubility at room temperature is preferably 50% or less, more preferably 25% or less, and furthermore preferably 10% or less. The category of a preferable compound can also be defined in terms of total number of carbon atoms of the whole compound. Specifically, the compound has carbon atoms preferably in the range of 15 to 65, more preferably in the range of 20 to 60, furthermore preferably in the range of 25 to 55, and most preferably in the range of 30 to 50, in total.

The metal complex for use in the present invention may have any kind of ligand. Dithiolate-series metal complexes and salicylaldoxime-series metal complexes are preferable, and salicylaldoxime-series metal complexes are more preferable.

As the metal complex for use in the present invention, there are many known metal complexes, including dithiolate-series nickel complexes and salicylaldoxime-series nickel complexes, which are effective. Preferable examples include compounds represented, for example, by, formula (I) of JP-B-61-13736, formula (I) of JP-B-61-13737, formula (I) of JP-B-61-13738, formula (I) of JP-B-61-13739, formula (I) of JP-B-61-13740, formula (I) of JP-B-61-13742, formula (I) of JP-B-61-13743, formula (I) of JP-B-61-13744, formula of JP-B-5-69212, formula (I) or (II) of JP-B-5-88809, formula of JP-A-63-199248, formula (I) or (II) of JP-A-64-75568, formula (I) or (II) of JP-A-3-182749, formula (II), (III), (IV) or (V) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,590,153, or formula (II), (III), or (IV) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,912,027.

As the metal complex, the compound represented by formula (TS-VIIIA) is preferable from the point of the effects of the present invention.

In formula (TS-VIIIA), R₁₀₁, R₁₀₂, R₁₀₃, and R₁₀₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent (e.g., an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, an acyl amino group). R₁₀₅ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, ethyl, vinyl, undecyl), or an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, naphthyl). R₁₀₆ represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group (e.g., methyl, ethyl), an aryl group (e.g., phenyl, 4-methylphenyl), or a hydroxyl group. M represents Cu, Co, Ni, Pd, or Pt. Two R₁₀₆s may combine together to form a 5- to 7-membered ring. R₁₀₁ and R₁₀₂, R₁₀₂ and R₁₀₃, R₁₀₃ and R₁₀₄, and R₁₀₄ and R₁₀₅, each two of which are adjacent to each other, may combine together to form a 5- to 6-membered ring.

In formula (TS-VIIIA), it is preferable from the point of the effects of the present invention that R₁₀₁, R₁₀₂, R₁₀₃, and R₁₀₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or an aliphatic oxy group, R₁₀₅ is a hydrogen atom, R₁₀₆ is a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, or a hydroxyl group, and M is Ni; and it is more preferable that R₁₀₁, R₁₀₂, R₁₀₃, and R₁₀₄ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic oxy group, R₁₀₅ is a hydrogen atom, R₁₀₆ is a hydroxyl group, and M is Ni.

An ultraviolet absorbing agent for use in the present invention is explained below.

The ultraviolet absorbing agent for use in the present invention is not particularly limited, so long as the compound has the maximum absorption wavelength (λmax) at 400 nm or less. The compounds represented by any of formulae (A), (B), (C), (D) and (E) are preferred.

In the formula, R₁₂₁ represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, or an alkoxy group. R₁₂₂ and R₁₂₃ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group.

Preferably, R₁₂₁ represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (for example, Cl, Br), an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms (for example, methyl, ethyl, butyl), or an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms (for example, methoxy, butoxy). R₁₂₂ and R₁₂₃, which may be the same or different from each other, each represent a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms (for example, methyl, ethyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, tert-octyl, dodecyl, carboxyethyl, n-octyloxycarbonylethyl), or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (for example, phenyl, p-chlorophenyl, p-methoxyphenyl).

In the formula, R₁₂₄, R₁₂₅ and R₁₂₆, which may be the same or different from each other, each represent a hydrogen atom, an alkoxy group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (for example, methoxy, ethoxy, dodecyloxy), or a hydroxyl group.

In the formula, R₁₂₇ represent a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkyl group. R₁₂₈ and R₁₂₉ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, or an alkyl group. R₁₂₈ and R₁₂₇, or R₁₂₉ and R₁₂₇ may adjoin each other to form a 5- or 6-membered ring. X_A and Y_A, which may be the same or different from each other, each represent CN, —COR₁₄₀, —COOR₁₄₀, —SO₂R₁₄₀, —CON(R₁₄₀)(R₁₄₁), or —COOH. R₁₄₀ and R₁₄₁ each independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group. R₁₄₁ may be a hydrogen atom.

Preferably, R₁₂₇ represents a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-butoxy), or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (for example, methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, iso-propyl). R₁₂₈ and R₁₂₉ each represent a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group or an alkyl group, in which the alkoxy group and the alkyl group each have the same meanings as in R₁₂₇. R₁₂₈ and R₁₂₇, or R₁₂₉ and R₁₂₇ may adjoin each other to form a 5- or 6-membered ring (for example, methylenedioxy ring). X_A and Y_A, which may be the same or different from each other, each represent —CN, —COR₁₄₀, —COOR₁₄₀, —SO₂R₁₄₀, —CON(R₁₄₀) (R₁₄₁), or —COOH. R₁₄₀ and R₁₄₁ each represent a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms (for example, methyl, ethyl, methoxyethyl, n-hexyl, phenoxyethyl) or a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms (for example, phenyl, p-chlorophenyl, p-methylphenyl, p-tert-butylphenyl). R₁₄₁ may be a hydrogen atom.

In the formula, R₁₃₀ and R₁₃₁ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, or an aryl group. R₁₃₀ and R₁₃₁ may be the same or different from each other, but they cannot be a hydrogen atom at the same time. Further, a 5- or 6-membered ring may be formed by R₁₃₀ and R₁₃₁ together with the N. X_A and Y_A have the same meanings as defined in formula (C).

Preferably, R₁₃₀ and R₁₃, each represent a hydrogen atom, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (for example, methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, n-dodecyl, methoxyethyl, ethoxyethyl), an alkenyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, or an aryl group (for example, phenyl, tolyl, p-chlorophenyl, p-methoxyphenyl). R₁₃₀ and R₁₃₁ may be the same or different from each other, but they can not be a hydrogen atom at the same time. Further, a 5- or 6-membered ring, e.g. a piperidine ring or a morpholine ring, may be formed by R₁₃₀ and R₁₃₁ together with the N. X_A and Y_A have the same meanings as mentioned in formula (C).

In the formula, R₁₃₂, R₁₃₃ and R₁₃₄ each independently represent a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, aryl group, alkoxyl group, aryloxy group, or heterocyclic group, in which at least one of the above R₁₃₂, R₁₃₃ and R₁₃₄ is represented by formula (F) set forth below.

In the formula, R₁₃₅ and R₁₃₆ each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, alkoxyl group or aryloxy group.

Examples of specific compounds of the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, and the ultraviolet absorbing agent are set forth below, but the present invention is not limited to these compounds.

• • TVII-11 Diglyceryl diisostearate
  • TVII-12 Pentaerythritol dioleate
  • TVII-13 Tetraglyceryl tristearate
  • TVII-14 Decaglyceryl pentaoleate
  • TVII-15 Sorbitan monooleate
  • TVII-16 Sorbitan sesquioleate
  • TVII-17 Sorbitan trioleate
  • TVII-18 Sorbitan monostearate
  • TVII-19 C₈H₁₇CH═CH(CH₂)₈OH
  • TVII-21 C₁₂H₂₅OH
  • TVII-22 C₁₄H₂₉OH
  • TVII-23 C₁₆H₃₃OH
  • TVII-24 C₁₈H₃₇OH
  • TVII-25 C₂₀H₄₁CH

Next, water-insoluble and organic solvent-soluble homopolymers or copolymers that can be used in the present invention are explained in detail below.

In the present invention, the term “water-insoluble” is used to mean that solubility to water is 0.1% or less. As the water-insoluble and organic solvent-soluble homopolymer or copolymer (hereinafter referred to as a polymer or copolymer for use in the present invention), various kinds of polymers and copolymers can be used. For example, those set forth below can be preferably used.

(1) Vinyl-Series Polymers and Copolymers

Monomers that form the vinyl-series polymers and copolymers that can be used in the present invention are more specifically set forth below.

There are illustrated, for example:

• Acrylic acid esters: for example, methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, n-propyl acrylate, isopropyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate, tert-butyl acrylate, isobutyl acrylate, sec-butyl acrylate, amyl acrylate, hexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, octyl acrylate, tert-octyl acrylate, 2-chloroethyl acrylate, 2-bromoethyl acrylate, 4-chlorobutyl acrylate, cyanoethyl acrylate, 2-acetoxyethyl acrylate, dimethylaminoethyl acrylate, benzyl acrylate, methoxybenzyl acrylate, 2-chlorocyclohexyl acrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, furfuryl acrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl acrylate, phenyl acrylate, 5-hydroxypentyl acrylate, 2,2-dimethyl-3-hydroxylpropyl acrylate, 2-methoxyethyl acrylate, 3-methoxybutyl acrylate, 2-ethoxyethyl acrylate, 2-iso-propoxyethyl acrylate, 2-butoxyethyl acrylate, 2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethyl acrylate, 2-(2-butoxyethoxy)ethyl acrylate, ω-methoxypolyethyleneglycol acrylate (addition number of moles: n=9), 1-bromo-2-methoxyethyl acrylate, 1,1-dichloro-2-ethoxyethyl acrylate;
• Methacrylic acid esters: for example, methyl methacrylate, ethyl methacrylate, n-propyl methacrylate, isopropyl methacrylate, n-butyl methacrylate, tert-butyl methacrylate, isobutyl methacrylate, sec-butyl methacrylate, amyl methacrylate, hexyl methacrylate, cyclohexyl methacrylate, benzyl methacrylate, chlorobenzyl methacrylate, octyl methacrylate, sulfopropyl methacrylate, N-ethyl-N-phenylaminoethyl methacrylate, 2-(3-phenylpropyloxy)ethyl methacrylate, dimethylaminophenoxyethyl methacrylate, furfuryl methacrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl methacrylate, phenyl methacrylate, cresyl methacrylate, naphthyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl methacrylate, triethyleneglycol monomethacrylate, dipropyleneglycol monomethacrylate, 2-methoxyethyl methacrylate, 3-methoxybutyl methacrylate, 2-acetoxyethyl methacrylate, 2-acetoacetoxyethyl methacrylate, 2-ethoxyethyl methacrylate, 2-iso-propoxyethyl methacrylate, 2-butoxyethyl methacrylate, 2-(2-methoxyethoxy)ethyl methacrylate, 2-(2-ethoxyethoxy)ethyl methacrylate, 2-(2-butoxyethoxy)ethyl methacrylate, ω-methoxypolyethyleneglycol methacrylate (addition number of moles: n=6);
• Vinyl esters: for example, vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, vinyl butylate, vinyl isobutylate, vinyl caproate, vinyl chloroacetate, vinyl methoxyacetate, vinyl phenylacetate, vinyl benzoate, vinyl salicylate;
• Acrylamides: for example, acrylamide, methylacrylamide, ethylacrylamide, propylacrylamide, butylacrylamide, tert-butylacrylamide, cyclohexylacrylamide, benzylacrylamide, hydroxymethylacrylamide, methoxyethylacrylamide, dimethylaminoethylacrylamide, phenylacrylamide, dimethylacrylamide, diethylacrylamide, β-cyanoethylacrylamide, N-(2-acetoacetoxyethyl)acrylamide, diacetonacrylamide;
• Methacrylamides: for example, methacrylamide, methylmethacrylamide, ethylmethacrylamide, propylmethacrylamide, butylmethacrylamide, tert-butylmethacrylamide, cyclohexylmethacrylamide, benzylmethacrylamide, hydroxymethylmethacrylamide, methoxyethylmethacrylamide, dimethylaminoethylmethacrylamide, phenylmethacrylamide, dimethylmethacrylamide, diethylmethacrylamide, β-cyanoethylmethacrylamide, N-(2-acetoacetoxyethyl)methacrylamide;
• Olefins: for example, dicyclopentadiene, ethylene, propylene, 1-butene, 1-pentene, vinyl chloride, vinylidene chloride, isoprene, chloroprene, butadiene, 2,3-dimethylbutadiene;
• Styrenes: for example, styrene, methyl styrene, dimethyl styrene, trimethyl styrene, ethyl styrene, isopropyl styrene, chloromethyl styrene, methoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, dichlorostyrene, bromostyrene, vinylbenzoate methyl ester;
• Crotonic acid esters: for example, butyl crotonate, hexyl crotonate;
• Itaconic acid diesters: for example, dimethyl itaconate, diethyl itaconate, dibutyl itaconate;
• Maleic acid diesters: for example, diethyl maleate, dimethyl maleate, dibutyl maleate; and
• Fumaric acid diesters: for example, diethyl fumarate, dimethyl fumarate, dibutyl fumarate.

Examples of other monomers are set forth below.

There are illustrated, for example:

• Allyl compounds: for example, allyl acetate, allyl caproate, allyl laurate, allyl benzoate;
• Vinyl ethers: for example, methyl vinyl ether, butyl vinyl ether, hexyl vinyl ether, methoxyethyl vinyl ether, dimethylaminoethyl vinyl ether;
• Vinyl ketones: for example, methyl vinyl ketone, phenyl vinyl ketone, methoxyethyl vinyl ketone;
• Vinyl heterocyclic compounds: for example, vinyl pyridine, N-vinylimidazole, N-vinyloxazolidone, N-vinyltriazole, N-vinylpyrrolidone;
• Glycidyl esters: for example, glycidyl acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate; and
• Unsaturated nitrites: for example, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile.

The polymer for use in the present invention may be a homopolymer of any of the above-mentioned monomers, or it may be a copolymer of at least two kinds of the monomers, if necessary. Further, the polymer for use in the present invention may contain a monomer component having an acid group in such a proportion that the acid group does not render the polymer water-soluble. The proportion of the monomer component having an acid group is preferably 20% or less. It is preferred that the polymer for use in the present invention contains none of the monomer component having an acid group. Examples of the monomer having an acid group include acrylic acid; methacrylic acid; itaconic acid; maleic acid; monoalkyl itaconate (for example, monomethyl itaconate), monoalkyl maleate (for example, monomethyl maleate), citraconic acid; styrene sulfonic acid; vinylbenzylsulfonic acid; vinylbenzene sulfonic acid; acryloyloxyalkyl sulfonic acid (for example, acryloyloxymethyl sulfonic acid); methacryloyloxyalkyl sulfonic acid (for example, methacryloyloxymethyl sulfonic acid, methacryloyloxyethyl sulfonic acid, methacryloyloxypropyl sulfonic acid); acrylamidoalkyl sulfonic acid (for example, 2-acrylamido-2-methylethane sulfonic acid, 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropane sulfonic acid, 2-acrylamido-2-methylbutane sulfonic acid); methacrylamidoalkyl sulfonic acid (for example, 2-methacrylamido-2-methylethane sulfonic acid, 2-methacrylamido-2-methylpropane sulfonic acid, 2-methacrylamido-2-methylbutane sulfonic acid); acryloyloxyalkylphosphate (for example, acryloyloxyethylphosphate, 3-acryloyloxypropyl-2-phosphate); and methacryloyloxyalkylphosphate (for example, methacryloyloxyethylphosphate, 3-methacryloyloxypropyl-2-phosphate).

These monomers having an acid group may be an alkali metal salt (for example, Na, K salts), or an ammonium salt.

As the monomer that forms the polymer for use in the present invention, acrylate-series, methacrylate-series, acrylamido-series and methacrylamido-series monomers are preferred.

The polymers formed from the above-mentioned monomers can be obtained according to the processes such as solution polymerization, bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, and latex polymerization. As the initiator that can be used for these polymerizations, use can be made of a water-soluble polymerization initiator and a lipophilic polymerization initiator.

As the water-soluble polymerization initiator, for example, use can be made of persulfate salts, such as potassium persulfate, ammonium persulfate, and sodium persulfate; water-soluble azo compounds, such as sodium 4,4′-azobis-4-cyanovalerate and 2,2′-azobis(2-amidinopropane)hydrochloride; and hydrogen peroxide.

As the lipophilic polymerization initiator, for example, mention can be made of lipophilic azo compounds, such as azobisisobutyronitrile, 2,2′-azobis(2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile), 2,2′-azobis(4-methoxy-2,4-dimethylvaleronitrile), 1,11-azobis(cyclohexanone-1-carbonitrile), 2,2′-azobisisobutyric acid dimethyl ester, and 2,2′-azobisisobutyric acid diethyl ester; benzoyl peroxide, lauryl peroxide, diisopropylperoxy dicarbonate, and di-tert-butyl peroxide.

(2) Polyester Resins Obtained by Condensation of Polyhydric Alcohols and Polybasic Acids

As the polyhydric alcohol, glycols having the structure set forth below or polyalkyleneglycols are useful. HO—Ra—OH

In the formula, Ra represents a hydrocarbon (especially an aliphatic hydrocarbon) having 2 to about 12 carbon atoms.

As the polybasic acid, polycaboxylic acids having the structure set forth below are useful. HOOC—Rb—COOH (Rb represents a single bond or a hydrocarbon having 1 to 12 carbon atoms.) As specific examples of the polyhydric alcohol, there are illustrated ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, 1,2-propylene glycol, 1,3-propylene glycol, trimethylolpropane, 1,4-butanediol, isobutylenediol, 1,5-pentanediol, neopentylglycol, 1,6-hexanediol, 1,7-heptanediol, 1,8-octanediol, 1,9-nonanediol, 1,10-decanediol, 1,11-undecanediol, 1,12-dodecanediol, 1,13-tridecanediol, 1,14-tetradecanediol, glycerol, diglycerol, triglycerol, 1-methyl glycerol, erythritol, mannitol, and sorbitol.

As specific examples of the polybasic acid, there are illustrated oxalic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, pimelic acid, cork acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, nonanedicarboxylic acid, decanedicarboxylic acid, undecanedicarboxylic acid, dodecanedicarboxylic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, itaconic acid, citraconic acid, phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, tetrachlorophthalic acid, metaconic acid, isopimelic acid, cyclopentadiene-anhydrous maleic acid adducts, and rosin-anhydrous maleic acid adducts.

(3) Polyesters Obtained by a Ring-Opening Polymerization Process

These polyesters can be obtained from β-propiolactone, caprolactone, dimethylpropiolactone or the like.

(4) Others

There are illustrated polycarbonate resins obtained by polycondensation of a glycol or divalent phenol and a carbonate or phosgene; polyurethane resins obtained by polyaddition of polyhydric alcohols and polyisocyanates; and polyamide resins obtained from polyamines and polybasic acids.

The number-average molecular weight of the polymer for use in the present invention is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 200,000 or less, and more preferably in the range of from 800 to 100,000.

Specific examples of the polymer for use in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these compounds. (The composition of a copolymer is indicated by a mass ratio.)

• P-1) poly(N-sec-butylacrylamide)
• P-2) poly(N-tert-butylacrylamide)
• P-3) diacetoneacrylamide/methyl methacrylate copolymer (25:75)
• P-4) poly(cyclohexyl methacrylate)
• P-5) N-tert-butylacrylamide/methyl methacrylate copolymer (60:40)
• P-6) poly(N,N-dimethylacrylamide)
• P-7) poly(tert-butyl methacrylate)
• P-8) poly(vinyl acetate)
• P-9) poly(vinyl propionate)
• P-10) poly(methyl methacrylate)
• P-11) poly(ethyl methacrylate)
• P-12) poly(ethyl acrylate)
• P-13) vinyl acetate/vinyl alcohol copolymer (90:10)
• P-14) poly(n-butyl acrylate)
• P-15) poly(n-butyl methacrylate)
• P-16) poly(isobutyl methacrylate)
• P-17) poly(isopropyl methacrylate)
• P-18) poly(octyl acrylate)
• P-19) n-butyl acrylate/acrylamide copolymer (95:5)
• P-20) stearyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (90:10)
• P-21) methyl methacrylate/vinyl chloride copolymer (70:30)
• P-22) methyl methacrylate/styrene copolymer (90:10)
• P-23) methyl methacrylate/ethyl acrylate copolymer (50:50)
• P-24) n-butyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/styrene copolymer (50:20:30)
• P-25) vinyl acetate/acrylamide copolymer (85:15)
• P-26) vinyl chloride/vinyl acetate copolymer (65:35)
• P-27) methyl methacrylate/acrylonitrile copolymer (65:35)
• P-28) n-butyl methacrylate/pentyl methacrylate/N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone copolymer (38:38:24)
• P-29) methyl methacrylate/n-butyl methacrylate/isobutyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (37:29:25:9)
• P-30) n-butyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (95:5)
• P-31) methyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (95:5)
• P-32) benzyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (93:7)
• P-33) n-butyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/benzyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (35:35:25:5)
• P-34) n-butyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/benzyl methacrylate copolymer (40:30:30)
• P-35) diacetoneacrylamide/methyl methacrylate copolymer (50:50)
• P-36) methyl vinyl ketone/isobutyl methacrylate copolymer (55:45)
• P-37) ethyl methacrylate/n-butyl acrylate copolymer (70:30)
• P-38) diacetoneacrylamide/n-butyl acrylate copolymer (60:40)
• P-39) methyl methacrylate/stearyl methacrylate/diacetoneacrylamide copolymer (40:40:20)
• P-40) n-butyl acrylate/stearyl methacrylate/diacetoneacrylamide copolymer (70:20:10)
• P-41) stearyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (50:40:10)
• P-42) methyl methacrylate/styrene/vinylsulfonamide copolymer (70:20:10)
• P-43) methyl methacrylate/phenyl vinyl ketone copolymer (70:30)
• P-44) n-butyl acrylate/methyl methacrylate/n-butyl methacrylate copolymer (35:35:30)
• P-45) n-butyl methacrylate/N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone copolymer (90:10)
• P-46) poly(pentyl acrylate)
• P-47) cyclohexyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/n-propyl methacrylate copolymer (37:29:34)
• P-48) poly(pentyl methacrylate)
• P-49) methyl methacrylate/n-butyl methacrylate copolymer (65:35)
• P-50) vinyl acetate/vinyl propionate copolymer (75:25)
• P-51) n-butyl methacrylate/sodium 3-acryloxybutane-1-sulfonate copolymer (97:3)
• P-52) n-butyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/acrylamide copolymer (35:35:30)
• P-53) n-butyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate/vinyl chloride copolymer (37:36:27)
• P-54) n-butyl methacrylate/styrene copolymer (82:18)
• P-55) tert-butyl methacrylate/methyl methacrylate copolymer (70:30)
• P-56) poly(N-tert-butylmethacrylamide)
• P-57) N-tert-butylacrylamide/methylphenyl methacrylate copolymer (60:40)
• P-58) methyl methacrylate/acrylonitrile copolymer (70:30)
• P-59) methyl methacrylate/methyl vinyl ketone copolymer (28:72)
• P-60) methyl methacrylate/styrene copolymer (75:25)
• P-61) methyl methacrylate/hexyl methacrylate copolymer (70:30)
• P-62) butyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (85:15)
• P-63) methyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (80:20)
• P-64) methyl methacrylate/acrylic acid copolymer (98:2)
• P-65) methyl methacrylate/N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone copolymer (90:10)
• P-66) n-butyl methacrylate/vinyl chloride copolymer (90:10)
• P-67) n-butyl methacrylate/styrene copolymer (70:30)
• P-68) 1,4-butanediol/adipic acid polyester
• P-69) ethylene glycol/sebacic acid polyester
• P-70) poly(caprolactam)
• P-71) poly(propiolactam)
• P-72) poly(dimethylpropiolactone)
• P-73) N-tert-butylacrylamide/dimethylaminoethylaramide copolymer (85:15)
• P-74) N-tert-butylmethacrylamide/vinylpyridine copolymer (95:5)
• P-75) diethyl maleate/n-butyl acrylate copolymer (65:35)
• P-76) N-tert-butylacrylamide/2-methoxyethyl acrylate copolymer (55:45)

The polymer of still another preferable mode that can be used in the present invention, is a polymer substantially insoluble in water, which comprises as a constituent element thereof a monomer unit having at least one aromatic group, and which has a number average molecular weight of less than 2,000. The number average molecular weight is preferably 200 or more but less than 2,000, and more preferably 200 or more but 1,000 or less. The polymer that can be used in the present invention may be a so-called homopolymer composed of one kind of monomer unit, or a copolymer composed of two kinds or more of monomer units. In the case of a copolymer, it preferably comprises the monomer unit having the aromatic group, according to the present invention in a proportion of 20% or more of the mass composition of the copolymer. The polymer structure is not particularly limited in so far as the above-mentioned condition is fulfilled. Examples of the polymer having the preferred polymer structure include a polymer whose constituent element is styrene, α-methylstyrene, β-methylstyrene, or a monomer having a substituent on the benzene ring of such a monomer; a polymer whose constituent element is an aromatic acrylamide, an aromatic methacrylamide, an aromatic acrylic ester, or an aromatic methacrylic ester. Examples of the aromatic group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a benzyl group, a biphenyl group, and the like. These aromatic groups may have a substituent(s) such as an alkyl group, a halogen atom, and the like. In the case of a copolymer, comonomers listed, for example, in JP-A-63-264748 can be used preferably. From the viewpoints of availability of raw materials and stability of an emulsion with the lapse of time, a polymer derived from styrene, α-methylstyrene or β-methylstyrene is preferable. As these polymers, P-1 to P-37 described in paragraph Nos. 0014 to 0020 of JP-A-7-140616 are preferred. The descriptions of these paragraphs in JP-A-7-140616 are herein preferably incorporated by reference.

In the present invention, preferably in the first embodiment of the present invention, it is preferred from the effects of the present invention, such as improvement in photo fading, to use the compound represented by formula (TS-II) and the compound represented by formula (Ph) in combination with the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3), and more preferably in addition to this combination, in combination with at least one selected from the group consisting of: the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) and (TS-III) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultraviolet absorbing agent, and the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer. Particularly preferably, in addition to the above combination, at least one selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I), (TS-V), (TS-VI) and (TS-VII), the ultraviolet absorbing agent, and the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer is used in combination.

With respect to the at least one compound(s) selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultraviolet ray absorbing agent, and the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, it is preferred from the viewpoint of the effects obtained by the present invention, preferably by the second and third embodiments of the present invention, to use at least one selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I), (TS-II), (TS-IV), (TS-V), (TS-VI) or (TS-VII), the ultraviolet ray absorbing agent, and the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I), (TS-II), (TS-V), (TS-VI) or (TS-VII), the ultraviolet ray absorbing agent, and the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer.

The compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultraviolet absorbing agent, or the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, each of which can be used in the present invention, each may be used singly or in combination with two or more kinds thereof. These additives may be added to the same layer as the layer containing the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) or the dye-forming coupler represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X), or to a separate layer from the layer containing the dye-forming coupler, with the former being preferred. Further, the ultraviolet absorbing agent is also preferably added to a layer adjacent to the layer containing a yellow dye-forming coupler, e.g. one represented by formula (I).

An addition amount of the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultraviolet absorbing agent, or the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer is preferably in the range of from 1 to 400 mass %, more preferably in the range of from 10 to 300 mass %, and most preferably in the range of from 15 to 200 mass %, to the dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) or the dye-forming coupler represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X).

In combination with the compound represented by formula (Ph), the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3), and at lease one selected from the group consisting of the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultraviolet absorbing agent, and the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, each for use in the present invention, other compound(s) may be used additionally.

Examples of the compound that may be used in combination with the above compounds/additives, include boron compounds represented by formula (I) described in JP-A-4-174430, epoxy compounds represented by formula (II) described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,183,731 or formula (Si) described in JP-A-8-53431, disulfide-series compounds represented by formula described in European Patent Publication EP271,322 B1 or formula (I), (II), (III) or (IV) described in JP-A-4-19736, reactive compounds represented by formula (I), (II), (III) or (IV) described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,242,785, cyclic phosphorous compounds represented by formula (1) described in JP-A-8-283279, alcoholic compounds represented by formula (SO) described in JP-A-7-84350, formula (G) described in JP-A-9-114061, formula (II) described in JP-A-9-146242, formula (A) described in JP-A-9-329876, or formula (VII) described in JP-A-62-175748. If the above-mentioned publications include exemplified compounds that are embraced in any of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII) for use in the present invention, these compounds are also included in the examples of the compounds for use in the present invention.

The dye-forming coupler for use in the present invention, the compound represented by formula (Ph), the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3), the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultraviolet absorbing agent, the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and the like additives for use in the present invention may be introduced into the photosensitive material according to known dispersion methods. It is preferable to use a water-in-oil dispersion method in which such a compound is dissolved in a high-boiling organic solvent (optionally in combination with a low-boiling organic solvent), and the solution is emulsified and dispersed in an aqueous gelatin solution, and then it is added to a silver halide emulsion. Further, it is preferable to use the metal complex for use in the present invention with dispersing it with a high-boiling organic solvent.

Examples of the high-boiling organic solvent that can be used in a water-in-oil dispersion method are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 2,322,027. Further, specific examples of a latex dispersion method as one of polymer dispersion methods are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 4,199,363, West German Patent (OLS) No. 2,541,274, JP-B-53-41091, European Patent Publication EP0,727,703 A1, and EP0,727,704 A1. Further, a dispersion method using a polymer that is soluble in an organic solvent is described in PCT International Publication WO88/723.

Examples of the high-boiling organic solvent that can be used in a water-in-oil dispersion method include phthalic acid esters (e.g., dibutyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate), esters of phosphoric acid or phosphonic acid (e.g., triphenyl phosphate, tricresyl phosphate, tri-2-ethylhexyl phosphate), fatty acid esters (e.g., di-2-ethylhexyl succinate, tributyl citrate), benzoic acid esters (e.g., 2-ethylhexyl benzoate, dodecyl benzoate), amides (e.g., N,N-diethyldodecane amide, N,N-dimethylolein amide), alcohols or phenols (e.g., iso-stearyl alcohol, 2,4-di-tert-amyl phenol), anilines (e.g., N,N-dibutyl-2-butoxy-5-tert-octylaniline), chlorinated paraffins, hydrocarbons (e.g., dodecyl benzene, diisopropyl naphthalene), and carboxylic acids (e.g., 2-(2,4-di-tert-amyl phenoxy)butyric acid). Further, the high-boiling point organic solvent may be used in combination with an auxiliary solvent, which is an organic solvent having a boiling point of 30° C. or more and 160° C. or less, such as ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, methylcellosolve acetate, and dimethylformamide. The high-boiling organic solvent is preferably used in an amount of 0 to 10 times (more preferably 0 to 4 times) that of a dye-forming coupler, in terms of mass ratio.

In order to emulsify and disperse the dye-forming coupler for use in the present invention and the compound for use in the present invention in a hydrophilic protective colloid to make lipophilic fine particles, dispersion is carried out using a dispersant such as a surface active agent, by means of a stirrer including an agitator, a homogenizer, a colloid mill, a flow-jet mixer (mill), a ultrasonic wave apparatus, and the like.

All or a part of the auxiliary solvent may be removed from an emulsified dispersion by means of a vacuum distillation, a noodle washing, an ultrafiltration, or the like, as occasion demands, for the purpose of improving storage stability with the lapse of time in the state of the emulsified dispersion, or inhibiting fluctuation in photographic properties or improving stability with the lapse of time of the final coating composition in which the emulsified dispersion is mixed with a silver halide emulsion.

The average particle size of the oleophilic fine particle dispersion thus obtained is preferably in the range of 0.04 to 0.50 μm, more preferably in the range of 0.05 to 0.30 μm, and most preferably in the range of 0.08 to 0.20 μm. The average particle size can be determined with a measuring device such as Coulter submicron particle analyzer model N4 (trade name, manufactured by Coulter Electronics Co., Ltd.).

The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material of the present invention, which may be referred to simply as “the photosensitive material” hereinafter, is explained in detail below.

The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material of the present invention is preferably a silver halide color photographic photosensitive material which has, on a support, at least one silver halide emulsion layer containing a yellow dye-forming coupler, at least one silver halide emulsion layer containing a magenta dye-forming coupler, and at least one silver halide emulsion layer containing a cyan dye-forming coupler.

In the present invention, the above-said silver halide emulsion layer containing a yellow dye-forming coupler functions as a yellow color-forming layer, the above-said silver halide emulsion layer containing a magenta dye-forming coupler functions as a magenta color-forming layer, and the above-said silver halide emulsion layer containing a cyan dye-forming coupler functions as a cyan color-forming layer. The silver halide emulsions contained in the yellow color-forming layer, the magenta color-forming layer, and the cyan color-forming layer may preferably have photosensitivities to mutually different wavelength regions (such as light in a blue region, light in a green region, and light in a red region).

The photosensitive material of the present invention may, if necessary, have a hydrophilic colloid layer, an antihalation layer, an intermediate layer, and a colored layer as described below, in addition to the above-said yellow color-forming layer, magenta color-forming layer, and cyan color-forming layer.

The silver halide photographic photosensitive material of the present invention can be used for various materials, such as color negative films, color positive films, color reversal films, color reversal papers, color papers, motion-picture color negatives, motion-picture color positives, display photosensitive materials, and color proof (especially, digital color proof) photosensitive materials.

The present invention is preferably applied to a photosensitive material that is used for direct view, such as a color photographic printing paper (color paper), a display photosensitive material, a color proof, a color reversal film (color reversal), a color reversal paper, and a motion picture color positive. Of these photosensitive materials, a color paper and a color reversal film are preferred.

In the case where the present invention is applied to a color paper, for example, the photosensitive materials described in JP-A-11-7109 are preferred. Particularly the description of the paragraph Nos. 0071 to 0087 in the JP-A-11-7109 is herein incorporated by reference.

In the case where the present invention is applied to a color negative film, the description of the paragraph Nos. 0115 to 0217 in JP-A-11-305396 is preferably applied, and the description is herein incorporated by reference.

In the case where the present invention is applied to a color reversal film, the photosensitive materials described in JP-A-2001-142181 are preferred. Specifically, the description of the paragraph Nos. 0164 to 0188 in the JP-A-2001-142181 and the description of the paragraph Nos. 0018 to 0021 in JP-A-11-84601 are preferably applied, and these descriptions are herein incorporated by reference.

The preferred silver halide photosensitive materials according to the present invention are explained in detail below.

Silver halide grains in the silver halide emulsion which can be used in the present invention, are preferably cubic or tetradecahedral crystal grains substantially having {100} planes (these grains may be rounded at the apexes thereof and further may have planes of higher order), or octahedral crystal grains. Alternatively, a silver halide emulsion in which the proportion of tabular grains having an aspect ratio of 2 or more: and composed of {100} or {111} planes accounts for 50% or more in terms of the total projected area, can also be preferably used. The term “aspect ratio” refers to the value obtained by dividing the diameter of the circle having an area equivalent to the projected area of an individual grain by the thickness of the grain. In the present invention, cubic grains, or tabular grains having {100} planes as major faces, or tabular grains having {111} planes as major faces are preferably used.

As a silver halide emulsion which can be used in the present invention, for example, silver chloride, silver bromide, silver iodobromide, or silver chloro(iodo)bromide emulsions may be used. It is preferable for a rapid processing to use a silver chloride, silver chlorobromide, silver chloroiodide, or silver chlorobromoiodide emulsions having a silver chloride content of 90 mol % or greater, more preferably the silver chloride, silver chlorobromide, silver chloroiodide, or silver chlorobromoiodide emulsions having a silver chloride content of 98 mol % or greater. Preferred of these silver halide emulsions are those having in the shell parts of silver halide grains a silver iodochloride phase of 0.01 to 0.50 mol %, more preferably 0.05 to 0.40 mol %, per mol of the total silver, in view of high sensitivity and excellent high illumination intensity exposure suitability. Further, especially preferred of these silver halide emulsions are those containing silver halide grains having on the surface thereof a silver bromide localized phase of 0.2 to 5 mol %, more preferably 0.5 to 3 mol %, per mol of the total silver, since both high sensitivity and stabilization of photographic properties are attained.

The silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention preferably contains silver iodide. In order to introduce iodide ions, an iodide salt solution may be added alone, or it may be added in combination with both a silver salt solution and a high chloride salt solution. In the latter case, the iodide salt solution and the high chloride salt solution may be added separately or as a mixture solution of these salts of iodide and high chloride. The iodide salt is generally added in the form of a soluble salt, such as alkali or alkali earth iodide salt. Alternatively, the iodide salt may be introduced by cleaving the iodide ions from an organic molecule, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,389,508. As another source of the iodide ion, fine silver iodide grains may be used.

The addition of an iodide salt solution may be concentrated at one time of grain formation process or may be performed over a certain period of time. For obtaining an emulsion with high sensitivity and low fog, the position of the introduction of an iodide ion to a high silver chloride emulsion is restricted. The deeper in the emulsion grain the iodide ion is introduced, the smaller is the increment of sensitivity. Accordingly, the addition of an iodide salt solution is preferably started at 50% or outer side of the volume of a grain, more preferably 70% or outer side, and most preferably 80% or outer side. Moreover, the addition of an iodide salt solution is preferably finished at 98% or inner side of the volume of a grain, most preferably 96% or inner side. When the addition of an iodide salt solution is finished at a little inner side of the grain surface, thereby an emulsion having higher sensitivity and lower fog can be obtained.

The distribution of an iodide ion concentration in the depth direction of a grain can be measured according to an etching/TOF-SIMS (Time of Flight-Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry) method by means of, for example, a TRIFT II Model TOF-SIMS apparatus (trade name, manufactured by Phi Evans Co.). A TOF-SIMS method is specifically described in Nippon Hyomen Kagakukai edited, Hyomen Bunseki Gijutsu Sensho Niji Ion Shitsuryo Bunsekiho (Surface Analysis Technique Selection-Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry), Maruzen Co., Ltd. (1999). When an emulsion grain is analyzed by the etching/TOF-SIMS method, it can be analyzed that iodide ions ooze toward the surface of the grain, even though the addition of an iodide salt solution is finished at an inner side of the grain. When the silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention contains silver iodide, it is preferred that the emulsion has the maximum concentration of iodide ions at the surface of the grain, and the iodide ion concentration decreases inwardly in the grain, in analysis by the etching/TOF-SIMS method.

The silver halide emulsion grains to be used in the photosensitive material of the present invention preferably have a silver bromide localized phase.

When the silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention contains a silver bromide localized phase, the silver bromide localized phase is preferably formed by epitaxial growth of the localized phase having a silver bromide content of at least 10 mol % or more on the grain surface. In addition, the emulsion grains preferably have the outermost shell portion having a silver bromide content of 0.1 mol % or more in the vicinity of the surface of the grains.

The silver bromide content of the silver bromide localized phase is preferably in the range of 1 to 80 mol %, and most preferably in the range of 5 to 70 mol %. The silver bromide localized phase is preferably composed of silver having population of 0.1 to 30 mol %, more preferably 0.3 to 20 mol %, to the molar amount of entire silver which constitutes silver halide grains for use in the present invention. The silver bromide localized phase is preferably doped with complex ions of a metal of the Group VIII, such as iridium ions. The amount of these compounds to be doped can be varied in a wide range depending on the purposes, and it is preferably in the range of 1×10⁻⁹ to 1×10⁻² mol per mol of silver halide.

In the present invention, ions of a metal are preferably added in the course of grain formation and/or growth of the silver halide grains, to include the metal ions in the inside and/or on the surface of the silver halide grains. The metal ions to be used are preferably ions of a transition metal. Preferable examples of the transition metal are iron, ruthenium, iridium, osmium, lead, cadmium or zinc. Further, 6-coordinated octahedral complex salts of these metal ions which have ligands are more preferably used. The ligand to be used may be an inorganic compound. When employing an inorganic compound as a ligand, cyanide ion, halide ion, thiocyanato, hydroxide ion, peroxide ion, azide ion, nitrite ion, water, ammonia, nitrosyl ion, or thionitrosyl ion is preferably used. Such a ligand is preferably coordinated to any metal ion selected from the above-mentioned iron, ruthenium, iridium, osmium, lead, cadmium and zinc. Two or more kinds of these ligands are also preferably used in one complex molecule.

Among them, the silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention particularly preferably contains an iridium ion having at least one organic ligand for the purpose of improving reciprocity failure at a high illuminance.

It is common in the case of other transition metal, when an organic compound is used as a ligand, preferable examples of the organic compound include chain compounds having a main chain of 5 or less carbon atoms and/or heterocyclic compounds of 5- or 6-membered ring. More preferable examples of the organic compound are those having at least a nitrogen, phosphorus, oxygen, or sulfur atom in a molecule as an atom which is capable of coordinating to a metal. Most preferred organic compounds are furan, thiophene, oxazole, isooxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, furazane, pyran, pyridine, pyridazine, pyrimidine and pyrazine. Further, organic compounds which have a substituent introduced into a basic skeleton of the above-mentioned compounds are also preferred.

Among these compounds, 5-methylthiazole among thiazole ligands is particularly preferably used as the ligand preferable for the iridium ion.

Preferable combinations of a metal ion and a ligand are those of iron and/or ruthenium ion and cyanide ion. Preferred of these compounds are those in which the number of cyanide ions accounts for the majority of the coordination sites (number) intrinsic to the iron or ruthenium that is the central metal. The remaining coordination sites are preferably occupied by thiocyan, ammonia, water, nitrosyl ion, dimethylsulfoxide, pyridine, pyrazine, or 4,4′-bipyridine. Most preferably each of 6 coordination sites of the central metal is occupied by a cyanide ion, to form a hexacyano iron complex or a hexacyano ruthenium complex. These metal complexes having cyanide ion ligands are preferably added, during grain formation, in an amount of 1×10⁻⁸ mol to 1×10⁻² mol, most preferably 1×10⁻⁶ mol to 5×10⁻⁴ mol, per mol of silver.

In case of the iridium complex, preferable ligands are fluoride, chloride, bromide and iodide ions, not only the organic ligands. Among these ligands, chloride and bromide ions are more preferably used. Specifically, preferable iridium complexes are the following compound in addition to those that have the above organic ligands: [IrCl₆]³⁻, [IrCl₆]²⁻, [IrCl₅(H₂O)]²⁻, [IrCl₅(H₂O)]⁻, [IrCl₄(H₂O)₂]⁻, [IrCl₄(H₂O)₂]⁰, [IrCl₃(H₂O)₃]⁰, [IrCl₃(H₂O)₃]⁺, [IrBr₆]²⁻, [IrBr₆]²⁻, [IrBr₅(H₂O)]²⁻, [IrBr₅(H₂O)]⁻, [IrBr₄(H₂O)₂]⁻, [IrBr₄(H₂O)₂]⁰, [IrBr₃(H₂O)₃]⁰, and [IrBr₃(H₂O)₃]⁺.

These iridium complexes are preferably added during grain formation in an amount of 1×10⁻¹⁰ mol to 1×10⁻³ mol, most preferably 1×10⁻⁸ mol to 1×10⁻⁵ mol, per mol of silver. In case of the ruthenium complex and the osmium complex, nitrosyl ion, thionitrosyl ion, water molecule, and chloride ion ligands are preferably used singly or in combination. More preferably these ligands form a pentachloronitrosyl complex, a pentachlorothionitrosyl complex, or a pentachloroaquo complex. The formation of a hexachloro complex is also preferred. These complexes are preferably added during grain formation in an amount of 1×10⁻¹⁰ mol to 1×10⁻⁶ mol, more preferably 1×10⁻⁹ mol to 1×10⁻⁶ mol, per mol of silver.

In the present invention, the above-mentioned complexes are preferably added directly to the reaction solution at the time of silver halide grain formation, or indirectly to the grain-forming reaction solution via addition to an aqueous halide solution for forming silver halide grains or other solutions, so that they are doped to the inside of the silver halide grains. Further, these methods may be combined, to incorporate the complex into the inside of the silver halide grains.

In case where these complexes are doped to the inside of the silver halide grains, they are preferably uniformly distributed in the inside of the grains. On the other hand, as disclosed in JP-A-4-208936, JP-A-2-125245 and JP-A-3-188437, they are also preferably distributed only in the grain surface layer. Alternatively they are also preferably distributed only in the inside of the grain while the grain surface is covered with a layer free from the complex. Further, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,252,451 and 5,256,530, it is also preferred that the silver halide grains are subjected to physical ripening in the presence of fine grains having complexes incorporated therein to modify the grain surface phase. Further, these methods may be used in combination. Two or more kinds of complexes may be incorporated in the inside of an individual silver halide grain. The halogen composition at the position (portion) where the complexes are incorporated, is not particularly limited, but they are preferably incorporated in any of a silver chloride layer (phase), a silver chlorobromide layer (phase), a silver bromide layer (phase), a silver iodochloride layer (phase) and a silver iodobromide layer (phase).

The silver halide grains contained in the silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention have an average grain size (the grain size herein means the diameter of the circle equivalent to the projected area of the grain, and the number average is taken as the average grain size) of preferably from 0.01 μm to 2 μm.

With respect to the distribution of sizes of these grains, so called monodisperse emulsion having a variation coefficient (the value obtained by dividing the standard deviation of the grain size distribution by the average grain size) of 20% or less, more preferably 15% or less, and further preferably 10% or less, is preferred. For obtaining a wide latitude, it is also preferred to blend the above-described monodisperse emulsions in the same layer or to form a multilayer structure using the monodisperse emulsions.

Various compounds or precursors thereof can be included in the silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention to prevent fogging from occurring or to stabilize photographic performance, during manufacture, storage or photographic processing of the photosensitive material. Specific examples of compounds useful for the above purposes are disclosed in JP-A-62-215272, pages 39 to 72, and they can be preferably used. In addition, 5-arylamino-1,2,3,4-thiatriazole compounds (the aryl residual group has at least one electron-attractive group) disclosed in European Patent No. 0447647 can also be preferably used.

Further, in order to enhance storage stability of the silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention, it is also preferred in the present invention to use hydroxamic acid derivatives described in JP-A-11-109576; cyclic ketones having a double bond adjacent to a carbonyl group, both ends of the double bond being substituted with an amino group or a hydroxyl group, as described in JP-A-11-327094 (particularly compounds represented by formula (S1); the description at paragraph Nos. 0036 to 0071 of JP-A-11-327094 is incorporated herein by reference); sulfo-substituted catecols and hydroquinones described in JP-A-11-143011 (for example, 4,5-dihydroxy-1,3-benzenedisulfonic acid, 2,5-dihydroxy-1,4-benzenedisulfonic acid, 3,4-dihydroxybenzenesulfonic acid, 2,3-dihydroxybenzenesulfonic acid, 2,5-dihydroxybenzenesulfonic acid, 3,4,5-trihydroxybenzenesulfonic acid, and salts of these acids); water-soluble reducing agents represented by formula (I), (II), or (III) of JP-A-11-102045.

Spectral sensitization can be carried out for the purpose of imparting spectral sensitivity in a desired light wavelength region to the photosensitive emulsion in each layer of the photosensitive material of the present invention.

Examples of spectral sensitizing dyes, which can be used in the photosensitive material of the present invention, for spectral sensitization of blue, green and red light regions include, for example, those disclosed by F. M. Harmer, in Heterocyclic Compounds—Cyanine Dyes and Related Compounds, John Wiley & Sons, New York, London (1964). Specific examples of compounds and spectral sensitization processes that can be preferably used in the present invention include those described in JP-A-62-215272, from page 22, right upper column to page 38. In addition, the spectral sensitizing dyes described in JP-A-3-123340 are very preferred as red-sensitive spectral sensitizing dyes for silver halide emulsion grains having a high silver chloride content, from the viewpoint of stability, adsorption strength, the temperature dependency of exposure, and the like.

The amount of these spectral sensitizing dyes to be added can be varied in a wide range depending on the occasion, and it is preferably in the range of 0.5×10⁻⁶ mole to 1.0×10⁻² mole, more preferably in the range of 1.0×10⁻⁶ mole to 5.0×10⁻³ mole, per mole of silver halide.

The silver halide emulsions for use in the present invention are generally chemically sensitized. Chemical sensitization can be performed by utilizing a sulfur sensitization, represented by the addition of an unstable sulfur compound, noble metal sensitization represented by gold sensitization, and reduction sensitization, each singly or in combination thereof. Compounds that are preferably used for chemical sensitization include those described in JP-A-62-215272, from page 18, right lower column to page 22, right upper column of these, gold-sensitized silver halide emulsion are particularly preferred, since a change in photographic properties which occurs when scanning exposure with laser beams or the like is conducted, can be further reduced by gold sensitization.

In order to conduct gold sensitization to the silver halide emulsion to be used in the present invention, various inorganic gold compounds, gold (I) complexes having an inorganic ligand, and gold (I) compounds having an organic ligand may be used. Inorganic gold compounds, such as chloroauric acid or salts thereof; and gold (I) complexes having an inorganic ligand, such as dithiocyanato gold compounds (e.g., potassium dithiocyanatoaurate (I)), and dithiosulfato gold compounds (e.g., trisodium dithiosulfatoaurate (I)), are preferably used.

As the gold (I) compounds having an organic ligand, the bis gold (I) mesoionic heterocycles described in JP-A-4-267249, for example, gold (I) tetrafluoroborate bis(1,4,5-trimethyl-1,2,4-triazolium-3-thiolate), the organic mercapto gold (I) complexes described in JP-A-11-218870, for example, potassium bis(1-[3-(2-sulfonatobenzamido)phenyl]-5-mercaptotetrazole potassium salt) aurate (I) pentahydrate, and the gold (I) compound with a nitrogen compound anion coordinated therewith described in JP-A-4-268550, for example, gold (I) bis (1-methylhydantoinate) sodium salt tetrahydrate may be used. Also, the gold (I) thiolate compound described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,503,749, the gold compounds described in JP-A-8-69074, JP-A-8-69075 and JP-A-9-269554, and the compounds described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,620,841, U.S. Pat. No. 5,912,112, U.S. Pat. No. 5,620,841, U.S. Pat. No. 5,939,245, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,912,111 may be used.

The amount of these compounds to be added can be varied in a wide range depending on the occasion, and it is generally in the range of 5×10⁻⁷ mole to 5×10⁻³ mole, preferably in the range of 5×10⁻⁷ mole to 5×10⁻⁴ mole, per mole of silver halide.

The silver halide emulsion for use in the present invention is preferably subjected to gold sensitization using a colloidal gold sulfide. A method of producing the colloidal gold sulfide is described in, for example, Research Disclosure, No. 37154, Solid State Ionics, Vol. 79, pp. 60 to 66 (1995), and Compt. Rend. Hebt. Seances Acad. Sci. Sect. B, Vol. 263, p. 1328 (1996). Colloidal gold sulfide having various grain sizes are applicable, and even those having a grain diameter of 50 nm or less are also usable. The amount of these compounds to be added can be varied in a wide range depending on the occasion, and it is generally in the range of 5×10⁻⁷ mol to 5×10⁻³ mol, preferably in the range of 5×10⁻⁶ mol to 5×10⁻⁴ mol, in terms of gold atom, per mol of silver halide.

In the present invention, gold sensitization may be used in combination with other sensitizing methods, for example, sulfur sensitization, selenium sensitization, tellurium sensitization, reduction sensitization, or noble metal sensitization using a noble metal compound other than gold compounds.

The photosensitive material of the present invention preferably contains, in their hydrophilic colloid layers, dyes (particularly oxonole dyes and cyanine dyes) that can be discolored by processing, as described in European Patent No. 0337490 A2, pages 27 to 76, in order to prevent irradiation or halation or to enhance, for example, safelight safety (immunity). Further, dyes described in European Patent No. 0819977 are also preferably used in the present invention. Among these water-soluble dyes, some deteriorate color separation or safelight safety when used in an increased amount. Preferable examples of the dye which can be used and which does not deteriorate color separation include water-soluble dyes described in JP-A-5-127324, JP-A-5-127325 and JP-A-5-216185.

In the present invention, it is possible to use a colored layer which can be discolored during processing, in place of the water-soluble dye, or in combination with the water-soluble dye. The colored layer that can be discolored with a processing, to be used, may contact with a photosensitive emulsion layer directly, or indirectly through an interlayer containing an agent for preventing color-mixing during processing, such as gelatin and hydroquinone. The colored layer is preferably provided as a lower layer (closer to a support) with respect to the emulsion layer which develops the same primary color as the color of the colored layer. It is possible to provide colored layers independently, each corresponding to respective primary colors. Alternatively, only one layer selected from them may be provided. In addition, it is possible to provide a colored layer subjected to coloring so as to match a plurality of primary-color regions. About the optical reflection density of the colored layer, it is preferred that, at the wavelength which provides the highest optical density in a range of wavelengths used for exposure (a visible light region from 400 nm to 700 nm for an ordinary printer exposure, and the wavelength of the light generated from the light source in the case of scanning exposure), the optical density is within the range of 0.2 to 3.0, more preferably 0.5 to 2.5, and particularly preferably 0.8 to 2.0.

The colored layer described above may be formed by a known method. For example, there are a method in which a dye in a state of a dispersion of solid fine-particles is incorporated in a hydrophilic colloid layer, as described in JP-A-2-282244, from page 3, upper right column to page 8, and JP-A-3-7931, from page 3, upper right column to page 11, left under column; a method in which an anionic dye is mordanted in a cationic polymer, a method in which a dye is adsorbed onto fine grains of silver halide or the like and fixed in the layer, and a method in which a colloidal silver is used as described in JP-A-1-239544. As to a method of dispersing fine-powder of a dye in solid state, for example, JP-A-2-308244, pages 4 to 13 describes a method in which fine particles of dye which is at least substantially water-insoluble at the pH of 6 or less, but at least substantially water-soluble at the pH of 8 or more, are incorporated. The method of mordanting anionic dyes in a cationic polymer is described, for example, in JP-A-2-84637, pages 18 to 26. U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,688,601 and 3,459,563 disclose a method of preparing a colloidal silver for use as a light absorber. Among these methods, preferred are the methods of incorporating fine particles of dye and of using a colloidal silver.

When the present invention is applied to a color paper, the color photographic printing paper preferably has at least one yellow color-forming silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magenta color-forming silver halide emulsion layer, and at least one cyan color-forming silver halide emulsion layer, on a support. Generally, these silver halide emulsion layers are in the order, from the support, of the yellow color-forming silver halide emulsion layer, the magenta color-forming silver halide emulsion layer, and the cyan color-forming silver halide emulsion layer. However, another layer arrangement which is different from the above, may be adopted.

In the photosensitive material of the present invention, a yellow coupler-containing silver halide emulsion layer may be provided at any position on a support. In the case where silver halide tabular grains are contained in the yellow coupler-containing layer, it is preferable that the yellow coupler-containing layer is positioned more apart from the support than at least one of a magenta coupler-containing silver halide emulsion layer and a cyan coupler-containing silver halide emulsion layer. Further, it is preferable that the yellow coupler-containing silver halide emulsion layer is positioned most apart from the support of other silver halide emulsion layers, from the viewpoint of color-development acceleration, desilvering acceleration, and reduction in a residual color due to a sensitizing dye. Further, it is preferable that the cyan coupler-containing silver halide emulsion layer is provided in the middle of other silver halide emulsion layers, from the viewpoint of reduction in blix fading. On the other hand, it is preferable that the cyan coupler-containing silver halide emulsion layer is the lowest layer, from the viewpoint of reduction in light fading. Further, each of a yellow-color-forming layer, a magenta-color-forming layer and a cyan-color-forming layer may be composed of two or three layers. It is also preferable that a color-forming layer is formed by providing a silver halide emulsion-free layer containing a coupler in adjacent to a silver halide emulsion layer, as described in, for example, JP-A-4-75055, JP-A-9-114035, JP-A-10-246940, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,576,159.

For example, as a photographic support (base), a transmissive type support or a reflective type support may be used. As the transmissive type support, it is preferred to use transparent supports, such as a cellulose nitrate film, and a transparent film of polyethyleneterephthalate, a cellulose triacetate film, or a polyester of 2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid (NDCA) and ethylene glycol (EG), or a polyester of NDCA, terephthalic acid and EG, provided thereon with an information-recording layer such as a magnetic layer. In the present invention, a reflective support (reflective-type support) is preferable. As the reflective type support, it is especially preferable to use a reflective support having a substrate laminated thereon with a plurality of polyethylene layers or polyester layers (water-proof resin layers or laminate layers), at least one of which contains a white pigment such as titanium oxide.

Preferred examples of silver halide emulsions and other materials (additives or the like) for use in the present invention, photographic constitutional layers (arrangement of the layers or the like), and processing methods for processing the photographic materials and additives for processing are disclosed, for example, in JP-A-62-215272, JP-A-2-33144 and European Patent No. 0355660 A2. Particularly, those disclosed in European Patent No. 0355660 A2 are preferably used. Further, it is also preferred to use silver halide color photographic photosensitive materials and processing methods thereof disclosed in, for example, JP-A-5-34889, JP-A-4-359249, JP-A-4-313753, JP-A-4-270344, JP-A-5-66527, JP-A-4-34548, JP-A-4-145433, JP-A-2-854, JP-A-1-158431, JP-A-2-90145, JP-A-3-194539, JP-A-2-93641 and European Patent Publication No. 0520457 A2.

As a support for use in the present invention, a reflective support, a transparent support, and the like are included.

In particular, as the above-described reflective support and silver halide emulsion, as well as the different kinds of metal ions to be doped in the silver halide grains, the storage stabilizers or antifogging agents of the silver halide emulsion, the methods of chemical sensitization (sensitizers), the methods of spectral sensitization (spectral sensitizers), the cyan, magenta, and yellow couplers and the emulsifying and dispersing methods thereof, the dye image stability-improving agents (stain inhibitors and discoloration inhibitors), the dyes (colored layers), the kinds of gelatin, the layer structure of the photosensitive material, and the film pH of the photosensitive material, those described in the patent publications as shown in the following table are particularly preferably used in the present invention.

TABLE 1
Element	JP-A-7-104448	JP-A-7-77775	JP-A-7-301895
Reflective-	Column 7,	Column 35,	Column 5,
type bases	line 12 to	line 43 to	line 40 to
	Column 12,	Column 44,	Column 9,
	line 19	line 1	line 26
Silver halide	Column 72,	Column 44,	Column 77,
emulsions	line 29 to	line 36 to	line 48 to
	Column 74,	Column 46,	Column 80,
	line 18	line 29	line 28
Different metal	Column 74,	Column 46,	Column 80,
ion species	lines 19	line 30 to	line 29 to
	to 44	Column 47,	Column 81,
		line 5	line 6
Storage	Column 75,	Column 47,	Column 18,
stabilizers	lines 9	lines 20	line 11 to
or antifoggants	to 18	to 29	Column 31,
			line 37
			(Especially,
			mercapto-
			heterocyclic
			compounds)
Chemical	Column 74,	Column 47,	Column 81,
sensitizing	line 45 to	lines 7	lines 9 to 17
methods	Column 75,	to 17
(Chemical	line 6
sensitizers)
Spectrally	Column 75,	Column 47,	Column 81,
sensitizing	line 19 to	line 30 to	line 21 to
methods	Column 76,	Column 49,	Column 82,
(Spectral	line 45	line 6	line 48
sensitizers)
Cyan couplers	Column 12,	Column 62,	Column 88,
	line 20 to	line 50 to	line 49 to
	Column 39,	Column 63,	Column 89,
	line 49	line 16	line 16
Yellow couplers	Column 87,	Column 63,	Column 89,
	line 40 to	lines 17	lines 17
	Column 88,	to 30	to 30
	line 3
Magenta couplers	Column 88,	Column 63,	Column 31,
	lines 4	line 3 to	line 34 to
	to 18	Column 64,	Column 77,
		line 11	line 44 and
			column 88,
			lines 32
			to 46
Emulsifying	Column 71,	Column 61,	Column 87,
and dispersing	line 3 to	lines 36	lines 35
methods of	Column 72,	to 49	to 48
couplers	line 11
Dye-image-	Column 39,	Column 61,	Column 87,
preservability	line 50 to	line 50 to	line 49 to
improving	Column 70,	Column 62,	Column 88,
agents	line 9	line 49	line 48
(antistaining
agents)
Anti-fading	Column 70,
agents	line 10 to
	Column 71,
	line 2
Dyes (coloring	Column 77,	Column 7,	Column 9,
agents)	line 42 to	line 14	line 27 to
	Column 78,	to Column 19,	Column 18,
	line 41	line 42, and	line 10
		Column 50,
		line 3
		to Column 51,
		line 14
Gelatins	Column 78,	Column 51,	Column 83,
	lines 42	lines 15	lines 13
	to 48	to 20	to 19
Layer	Column 39,	Column 44,	Column 31,
construction	lines 11	lines 2	line 38 to
of photosensitive	to 26	to 35	Column 32,
materials			line 33
pH of coated	Column 72,
film of	lines 12
photosensitive	to 28
material
Scanning	Column 76,	Column 49,	Column 82,
exposure	line 6 to	line 7 to	line 49 to
	Column 77,	Column 50,	Column 83,
	line 41	line 2	line 12
Preservatives	Column 88,
in developing	line 19 to
solution	Column 89,
	line 22

As cyan, magenta and yellow couplers which can be additionally used in the present invention, in addition to the above mentioned ones, those disclosed in JP-A-62-215272, page 91, right upper column, line 4 to page 121, left upper column, line 6, JP-A-2-33144, page 3, right upper column, line 14 to page 18, left upper column, bottom line, and page 30, right upper column, line 6 to page 35, right under column, line 11, European Patent No. 0355,660 (A2), page 4, lines 15 to 27, page 5, line 30 to page 28, bottom line, page 45, lines 29 to 31, page 47, line 23 to page 63, line 50, are also advantageously used.

Further, it is preferred in the present invention to add compounds represented by formula (II) or (III) in WO 98/33760 and compounds represented by formula (D) described in JP-A-10-221825.

As the cyan dye-forming coupler (hereinafter also referred to as “cyan coupler”) which can be used in the present invention, pyrrolotriazole-series couplers are preferably used, and more specifically, couplers represented by any of formulae (I) and (II) in JP-A-5-313324 and couplers represented by formula (I) in JP-A-6-347960 are preferred. Exemplified couplers described in these publications are particularly preferred. Further, phenol-series or naphthol-series cyan couplers are also preferred. For example, cyan couplers represented by formula (ADF) described in JP-A-10-333297 are preferred. As preferable cyan couplers other than the foregoing cyan couplers, there are pyrroloazole-type cyan couplers described in European Patent Nos. 0 488 248 and 0 491 197 (A1), 2,5-diacylamino phenol couplers described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,888,716, pyrazoloazole-type cyan couplers having an electron-withdrawing group or a group bonding via hydrogen bond at the 6-position, as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,873,183 and 4,916,051, and particularly pyrazoloazole-type cyan couplers having a carbamoyl group at the 6-position, as described in JP-A-8-171185, JP-A-8-311360 and JP-A-8-339060.

In addition, the cyan dye-forming coupler according to the present invention can also be a diphenylimidazole-series cyan coupler described in JP-A-2-33144; as well as a 3-hydroxypyridine-series cyan coupler (particularly a 2-equivalent coupler formed by allowing a 4-equivalent coupler of a coupler (42), to have a chlorine splitting-off group, and couplers (6) and (9), enumerated as specific examples are particularly preferable) described in EP 0333185 A2; a cyclic active methylene-series cyan coupler (particularly couplers 3, 8, and 34 enumerated as specific examples are particularly preferable) described in JP-A-64-32260; a pyrrolopyrozole-type cyan coupler described in European Patent No. 0456226 A1; and a pyrroloimidazole-type cyan coupler described in European Patent No. 0484909.

Among these cyan couplers, pyrroloazole-series cyan couplers represented by formula (I) described in JP-A-11-282138 are particularly preferred. The descriptions of the paragraph Nos. 0012 to 0059 including exemplified cyan couplers (1) to (47) of the above JP-A-11-282138 can be entirely applied to the present invention, and therefore they are preferably incorporated herein by reference.

The magenta dye-forming coupler (which may be referred to simply as a “magenta coupler” hereinafter) represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) that can be used in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, can be used singly or in combination with other magenta dye-forming coupler(s). As the above other magenta dye-forming coupler to be used in combination, use can be made of any of 5-pyrazolone-series magenta couplers and pyrazoloazole-series magenta couplers such as those described in the above-mentioned patent publications in the above table. Among these, preferred are pyrazolotriazole couplers in which a secondary or tertiary alkyl group is directly bonded to the 2-, 3- or 6-position of the pyrazolotriazole ring, such as those described in JP-A-61-65245; pyrazoloazole couplers having a sulfonamido group in its molecule, such as those described in JP-A-61-65246; pyrazoloazole couplers having an alkoxyphenylsulfonamido ballasting group, such as those described in JP-A-61-147254; and pyrazoloazole couplers having an alkoxy or aryloxy group at the 6-position, such as those described in European Patent Nos. 0226849 A2 and 0294785 A, in view of the hue and stability of image to be formed therefrom and color-forming property of the couplers.

As the magenta dye-forming coupler (sometimes referred to simply as “magenta coupler”) for use in the present invention, preferably in the first and second embodiments of the present invention, it is preferable to use the magenta dye-forming coupler that is described as a magenta dye-forming coupler capable of using in combination of the dye-forming coupler represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) in the third embodiment of the present invention. Particularly as the magenta coupler, the pyrazoloazole couplers represented by formula (M-I) described in JP-A-8-122984 are preferred. The description of paragraph Nos. 0009 to 0026 of the above JP-A-8-122984 is applied to the present invention and herein incorporated by reference. In addition, the pyrazoloazole couplers having a steric hindrance group at both of the 3- and the 6-positions, as described in European Patent (EP) Nos.854,384 and 884,640 are also preferably used.

The yellow dye-forming coupler (herein also referred to simply as “yellow coupler”) that can be used in the present invention, preferably the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) for use in the first embodiment of the present invention, or the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (Ia) for use in the second embodiment of the present invention, can be used singly or in combination with other yellow dye-forming coupler(s). As the above other yellow dye-forming coupler to be used in combination, use can be preferably made of acylacetamide-type yellow couplers in which the acyl group has a 3-membered to 5-membered cyclic structure, as described in European Patent No. 0 447 969 A1; malondianilide-type yellow couplers having a cyclic structure, as described in European Patent No. 0482552 A1; pyrrole-2 or 3-yl- or indole-2 or 3-yl-carbonylacetoanilide-series couplers, as described in European Patent Nos. 953 870 A1, 953 871 A1, 953 872 A1, 953 873 A1, 953 874 A1 and 953 875 A1; acylacetamide-type yellow couplers having a dioxane structure, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,118,599, in addition to the compounds described in the above-mentioned table. Above all, acylacetamide-type yellow couplers in which the acyl group is a 1-alkylcyclopropane-1-carbonyl group, and malondianilide-type yellow couplers in which one of the anilido groups constitutes an indoline ring are especially preferably used. These couplers may be used singly or in combination.

As the yellow dye-forming coupler (herein also referred to as “yellow coupler”) that can be used in the present invention, preferably in the third embodiment of the present invention, it is preferable to use the yellow dye-forming coupler that is described as a yellow dye-forming coupler capable of using in combination with the dye-forming coupler represented by formulae (I) or (Ia) in the first or second embodiment of the present invention. In addition, use can be also made of acetate-series or acetanilide-series couplers having 1,2,4-benzothiadiazine-1,1-dioxide bonded thereto, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,841,880, JP-A-52-82423, JP-A-2-28645, and European Patent Publication (EP) No. 1246006.

It is preferred that couplers for use in the present invention, are pregnated into a loadable latex polymer (as described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 4,203,716) in the presence (or absence) of the high-boiling-point organic solvent described in the foregoing table, or they are dissolved in the presence (or absence) of the foregoing high-boiling-point organic solvent with a polymer insoluble in water but soluble in an organic solvent, and then emulsified and dispersed into an aqueous hydrophilic colloid solution. Examples of the water-insoluble but organic solvent-soluble polymer which can be preferably used, include the homo-polymers and co-polymers as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,857,449, from column 7 to column 15 and WO 88/00723, from page 12 to page 30. The use of methacrylate-series or acrylamide-series polymers, especially acrylamide-series polymers are more preferable in view of color-image stabilization and the like.

In the present invention, known color mixing-inhibitors may be used. Among these compounds, those described in the following patent publications are preferred.

For example, high molecular weight redox compounds described in JP-A-5-333501; phenidone- or hydrazine-series compounds as described in, for example, WO 98/33760 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,923,787; and white couplers as described in, for example, JP-A-5-249637, JP-A-10-282615 and German Patent Publication No. 19629142 A1, may be used. Particularly, in order to accelerate developing speed by increasing the pH of a developing solution, redox compounds described in, for example, German Patent No. 19,618,786 A1, European Patent Nos. 0,839,623 A1 and 0,842,975 A1, German Patent No. 19,806,846 A1 and French Patent No. 2,760,460 A1, are also preferably used.

In the present invention, as an ultraviolet ray absorbent, it is preferred to use compounds having a high molar extinction coefficient and a triazine skeleton. For example, those described in the following patent publications can be used. These compounds are preferably added to the photosensitive layer or/and the light-nonsensitive layer. For example, use can be made of those described, in JP-A-46-3335, JP-A-55-152776, JP-A-5-197074, JP-A-5-232630, JP-A-5-307232, JP-A-6-211813, JP-A-8-53427, JP-A-8-234364, JP-A-8-239368, JP-A-9-31067, JP-A-10-115898, JP-A-10-147577, JP-A-10-182621, German Patent No. 19,739,797A, European Patent No. 0,711,804 A and JP-T-8-501291 (“JP-T” means searched and published International patent application), and the like.

As the binder or protective colloid, which can be used in the photosensitive material according to the present invention, gelatin is used advantageously, but another hydrophilic colloid can be used singly or in combination with gelatin. It is preferable for the gelatin that the content of heavy metals, such as Fe, Cu, Zn and Mn, included as impurities, be reduced to 5 ppm or below, more preferably 3 ppm or below. Further, the amount of calcium contained in the photosensitive material is preferably 20 mg/m² or less, more preferably 10 mg/m² or less, and most preferably 5 mg/m² or less.

In the present invention, it is preferred to add an antibacterial (fungi-preventing) agent and antimold agent, as described in JP-A-63-271247, in order to destroy various kinds of molds and bacteria which propagate in a hydrophilic colloid layer and deteriorate the image. Further, the pH of the coated film of the photosensitive material is preferably in the range of 4.0 to 7.0, more preferably in the range of 4.0 to 6.5.

In the present invention, a surface-active agent may be added to the photosensitive material, in view of improvement in coating-stability, prevention of static electricity from being occurred, and adjustment of the charge amount. As the surface-active agent, there are anionic, cationic, betaine and nonionic surfactants. Examples thereof include those described in JP-A-5-333492. As the surface-active agent for use in the present invention, a fluorine-containing surface-active agent is particularly preferred. The fluorine-containing surface-active agent may be used singly or in combination with known another surface-active agent. The fluorine-containing surfactant is preferably used in combination with known another surface-active agent. The amount of the surface-active agent to be added to the photosensitive material is not particularly limited, but generally in the range of 1×10⁻⁵ to 1 g/m², preferably in the range of 1×10⁻⁴ to 1×10⁻¹ g/m², and more preferably in the range of 1×10⁻³ to 1×10⁻² g/m².

The photosensitive material of the present invention can form an image, by an exposure step in which the photosensitive material is irradiated with light according to image information, and a development step in which the photosensitive material irradiated with light is processed to develop an image.

The photosensitive material of the present invention can preferably be used, in a scanning exposure system using a cathode ray tube (CRT), in addition to the printing system using a usual negative printer. The cathode ray tube exposure apparatus is simpler and more compact, and therefore less expensive than an apparatus using a laser. Further, optical axis and color (hue) can easily be adjusted. In a cathode ray tube which is used for image-wise exposure, various light-emitting materials which emit a light in the spectral region, are used as occasion demands. For example, any one of red-light-emitting materials, green-light-emitting materials, blue-light-emitting materials, or a mixture of two or more of these light-emitting materials may be used. The spectral regions are not limited to the above red, green and blue, and fluorophoroes which can emit a light in a region of yellow, orange, purple or infrared can be used. Particularly, a cathode ray tube which emits a white light by means of a mixture of these light-emitting materials, is often used.

In the case where the photosensitive material has a plurality of photosensitive layers each having different spectral sensitivity distribution from each other and also the cathode ray tube has a fluorescent substance which emits light in a plurality of spectral regions, exposure to a plurality of colors may be carried out at the same time. Namely, a plurality of color image signals may be input into a cathode ray tube, to allow light to be emitted from the surface of the tube. Alternatively, a method in which an image signal of each of colors is successively input and light of each of colors is emitted in order, and then exposure is carried out through a film capable of cutting a color other than the emitted color, i.e., a surface successive exposure, may be used. Generally, among these methods, the surface successive exposure is preferred from the viewpoint of high quality enhancement, because a cathode ray tube having a high resolving power can be used.

The photosensitive material of the present invention can preferably be used in the digital scanning exposure system using monochromatic high density light, such as a gas laser, a light-emitting diode, a semiconductor laser, a second harmonic generation light source (SHG) comprising a combination of nonlinear optical crystal with a semiconductor laser or a solid state laser using a semiconductor laser as an excitation light source. It is preferred to use a semiconductor laser, or a second harmonic generation light source (SHG) comprising a combination of nonlinear optical crystal with a solid state laser or a semiconductor laser, to make a system more compact and inexpensive. In particular, to design a compact and inexpensive apparatus having a longer duration of life and high stability, use of a semiconductor laser is preferable; and it is preferred that at least one of exposure light sources would be a semiconductor laser.

When such a scanning exposure light source is used, the maximum spectral sensitivity wavelength of the photosensitive material of the present invention can be arbitrarily set up according to the wavelength of a scanning exposure light source to be used. Since oscillation wavelength of a laser can be made half, using a SHG light source (a second harmonic generation light source) obtainable by a combination of a nonlinear optical crystal with a semiconductor laser or a solid state laser using a semiconductor as an excitation light source, blue light and green light can be obtained. Accordingly, it is possible to have the spectral sensitivity maximum of a photosensitive material in normal three wavelength regions of blue, green and red. The exposure time in such a scanning exposure is defined as the time necessary to expose the size of the picture element (pixel) with the density of the picture element being 400 dpi, and preferred exposure time is 1×10⁻⁴ sec or less and more preferably 1×10⁻⁶ sec or less.

The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material of the present invention can be preferably used in combination with the exposure and development systems described, for example, in the following known literatures. Example of the development system include the automatic print and development system described in JP-A-10-333253, the photosensitive material conveying apparatus described in JP-A-2000-10206, a recording system including the image reading apparatus, as described in JP-A-11-215312, an exposure systems with the color image recording method, as described in JP-A-11-88619 and JP-A-10-202950, a digital photo print system including the remote diagnosis method, as described in JP-A-10-210206, and a photo print system including the image recording apparatus, as described in JP-A-2000-310822.

The preferred scanning exposure methods which can be applied to the present invention are described in detail in the publications in the above table 1.

It is preferred to use a band stop filter, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,880,726, when the photographic material of the present invention is subjected to exposure with a printer. Color mixing of light can be excluded and color reproducibility is remarkably improved by the above means.

In the present invention, a yellow microdot pattern may be previously formed by pre-exposure before giving an image information, to thereby perform a copy restraint, as described in European Patent Nos. 0789270 A1 and 0789480 A1.

Further, in order to process the photosensitive material of the present invention, processing materials and processing methods described in JP-A-2-207250, page 26, right lower column, line 1, to page 34, right upper column, line 9, and in JP-A-4-97355, page 5, left upper column, line 17, to page 18, right lower column, line 20, can be preferably applied, and these are herein preferably incorporated by reference. Further, as the preservative that can be used for this developing solution, compounds described in the patent publications listed in the above Table are preferably used.

The present invention is also preferably applied to a photosensitive material having rapid processing suitability. In the case of conducting rapid processing, the color-developing time is preferably 60 sec or less, more preferably from 50 sec to 6 sec, and further preferably from 30 sec to 6 sec. Likewise, the blix time is preferably 60 sec or less, more preferably from 50 sec to 6 sec, and further preferably from 30 sec to 6 sec. Further, the washing or stabilizing time is preferably 150 sec or less, and more preferably from 130 sec to 6 sec.

Herein, the term “color-developing time” as used herein means a period of time required from the beginning of dipping a photosensitive material into a color-developing solution until the photosensitive material is dipped into a blix solution in the subsequent processing step. In the case where a processing is carried out using, for example, an autoprocessor, the color-developing time is the sum total of a time in which a photosensitive material has been dipped in a color-developing solution (so-called “time in the solution”) and a time in which the photosensitive material has left the solution and been conveyed in air toward a bleach-fixing bath in the step subsequent to color development (so-called “time in the air”). Likewise, the term “blix time” as used herein means a period of time required from the beginning of dipping the photosensitive material into a blix solution until the photosensitive material is dipped into a washing bath or a stabilizing bath in the subsequent processing step. Further, the term “washing or stabilizing time” as used herein means a period of time required from the beginning of dipping the photosensitive material into a washing solution or a stabilizing solution until the end of the dipping toward a drying step (so-called “time in the solution”).

Examples of a development method applicable to the photosensitive material of the present invention after exposure, include a conventional wet system, such as a development method using a developing solution containing an alkali agent and a developing agent, and a development method wherein a developing agent is incorporated in the photosensitive material and an activator solution, e.g., a developing agent-free alkaline solution is employed for the development, as well as a heat development system using no processing solution. In particular, the activator method is preferred to the other methods, because the processing solutions contain no developing agent, thereby it enables easy management and handling of the processing solutions and reduction in waste disposal load to make for environmental preservation.

The preferable developing agents or their precursors incorporated in the photosensitive materials in the case of adopting the activator method include the hydrazine-type compounds described in, for example, JP-A-8-234388, JP-A-9-152686, JP-A-9-152693, JP-A-9-211814 and JP-A-9-160193.

Further, the processing method in which the photographic material reduced in the amount of silver to be applied undergoes the image amplification processing using hydrogen peroxide (intensification processing), can be employed preferably. In particular, it is preferable to apply this processing method to the activator method. Specifically, the image-forming methods utilizing an activator solution containing hydrogen peroxide, as disclosed in JP-A-8-297354 and JP-A-9-152695 can be preferably used. Although the processing with an activator solution is generally followed by a desilvering step in the activator method, the desilvering step can be omitted in the case of applying the image amplification processing method to photographic materials having a reduced silver amount. In such a case, washing or stabilization processing can follow the processing with an activator solution to result in simplification of the processing process. On the other hand, when the system of reading the image information from photographic materials by means of a scanner or the like is employed, the processing form requiring no desilvering step can be applied, even if the photographic materials are those having a high silver amount, such as photographic materials for shooting.

As the processing materials and processing methods of the activator solution, desilvering solution (bleach/fixing solution), washing solution and stabilizing solution, which can be used in the present invention, known ones can be used. Preferably, those described in Research Disclosure, Item 36544, pp. 536-541 (September 1994), and JP-A-8-234388 can be used in the present invention.

The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material of the present invention is excellent in rapid processing suitability. Further, the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material of the present invention is excellent in color-forming property, color reproduction, and image fastness after processing.

In particular, the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material of the first embodiment of the present invention is also excellent in fastness to light in the dye image area (particularly the yellow dye image area) and the white background area.

Further, the silver halide color photographic photosensitive material of the second and third embodiments of the present invention is also excellent in processing stability when processed with a running solution.

The present invention will be described in more detail based on the following examples, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

EXAMPLES

Example 1

(Preparation of Emulsion B-H)

Using a usual method of mixing silver nitrate and sodium chloride added at the same time to an aqueous gelatin solution under stirring, an emulsion of cubic high silver chloride having an equivalent-sphere diameter of 0.55 μm and a variation coefficient of 10% was prepared. Herein, the term “equivalent-sphere diameter” means a diameter of a sphere whose volume is equivalent to that of an individual silver halide grain. In this preparation, potassium bromide (2 mole % per mole of the finished silver halide), RhBr₅(H₂O) and K₄[Ru(CN)₆] were added at the step of from 80% to 90% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount. At the completion of 90% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount, potassium iodide (0.3 mole % per mole of the finished silver halide) was added. Further, K₂[Ir(5-methylthiazole)Cl₅] and K₂[Ir(H₂O)Cl₅] were added at the step of from 92% to 98% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount. After desalting, gelatin was added to the resulting emulsion for re-dispersion. To the emulsion, sodium thiosulfonate and the sensitizing dye A, the sensitizing dye B and the sensitizing dye C each set forth below were added, and the resulting emulsion was optimally ripened with sodium thiosulfate pentahydrate as a sulfur sensitizing agent, and gold (I) thioglucose as a gold sensitizing agent. Further, 1-phenyl-5-mercaptotetrazole and 1-(5-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole were added. The thus-obtained emulsion was referred to as Emulsion B-H.

(Preparation of Emulsion B-L)

An emulsion of cubic high silver chloride having an equivalent-sphere diameter of 0.45 μm and a variation coefficient of 10% was prepared in the same manner as Emulsion B-H, except for changing only the addition rates of silver nitrate and sodium chloride. The thus-obtained emulsion was referred to as Emulsion B-L. (Preparation of Emulsion G-H)

Using a usual method of mixing silver nitrate and sodium chloride added at the same time to an aqueous gelatin solution under stirring, an emulsion of cubic high silver chloride having an equivalent-sphere diameter of 0.35 μm and a variation coefficient of 10% was prepared. In this preparation, RhBr₅(H₂O) and K₄[Ru(CN)₆] were added at the step of from 80% to 90% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount. At the step of from 80% to 100% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount, potassium bromide (4 mole % per mole of the finished silver halide) was added. At the completion of 90% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount, potassium iodide (0.2 mole % per mole of the finished silver halide) was added. K₂[Ir(5-methylthiazole)Cl₅] was added at the step of from 92% to 95% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount. Further, K₂[Ir(H₂O)Cl₅] was added at the step of from 92% to 98% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount. After desalting, gelatin was added to the resulting emulsion for re-dispersion. To the emulsion, sodium thiosulfonate was added, and the resulting emulsion was optimally ripened with sodium thiosulfate pentahydrate as a sulfur sensitizing agent, and gold (I) thioglucose as a gold sensitizing agent. Further, the sensitizing dyes D, E, F and G each set forth below, 1-phenyl-5-mercaptotetrazole, 1-(5-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole and potassium bromide were added. The thus-obtained emulsion was referred to as Emulsion G-H.

(Preparation of Emulsion G-L)

An emulsion of cubic high silver chloride having an equivalent-sphere diameter of 0.28 μm and a variation coefficient of 10% was prepared in the same manner as Emulsion G-H, except for changing only the addition rates of silver nitrate and sodium chloride. The thus-obtained emulsion was referred to as Emulsion G-L. (Preparation of Emulsion R-H)

Using a usual method of mixing silver nitrate and sodium chloride added at the same time to an aqueous gelatin solution under stirring, an emulsion of cubic high silver chloride having an equivalent-sphere diameter of 0.35 μm and a variation coefficient of 10% was prepared. In this preparation, K₄[Ru(CN)₆] was added at the step of from 80% to 90% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount. At the step of from 80% to 100% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount, potassium bromide (4.3 mole % per mole of the finished silver halide) was added. At the completion of 90% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount, potassium iodide (0.10 mole % per mole of the finished silver halide) was added. K₂[Ir(5-methylthiazole)Cl₅] was added at the step of from 92% to 95% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount. Further, K₂[Ir(H₂O)Cl₅] was added at the step of from 92% to 98% addition of the entire silver nitrate amount. After desalting, gelatin was added to the resulting emulsion for re-dispersion. To the emulsion, sodium thiosulfonate was added, and the resulting emulsion was optimally ripened with sodium thiosulfate pentahydrate as a sulfur sensitizing agent, and gold (I) thioglucose as a gold sensitizing agent. Further, the sensitizing dye H set forth below, 1-phenyl-5-mercaptotetrazole, 1-(5-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole, the compound I set forth below, and potassium bromide were added. The thus-obtained emulsion was referred to as Emulsion R-H.

(Preparation of Emulsion R-L)

An emulsion of cubic high silver chloride having an equivalent-sphere diameter of 0.28 μm and a variation coefficient of 10% was prepared in the same manner as Emulsion R-H, except for changing only the addition rates of silver nitrate and sodium chloride. The thus-obtained emulsion was referred to as Emulsion R-L. (Preparation of a Coating Solution for the First Layer)

Into 26 g of a solvent (Solv-4), 4 g of a solvent (Solv-6), 26 g of a solvent (Solv-9) and 60 ml of ethyl acetate were dissolved 31.9 g of a yellow coupler (6), 1.0 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-1), 1.0 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-2), 7.4 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-8), 1.0 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-21), 1.0 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-18), 7.4 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-19), 8.4 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-20), 0.1 g of an additive (ExC-1), and 1.0 g of a color-image stabilizer (UV-2). This solution was emulsified and dispersed in 270 g of a 20 mass % aqueous gelatin solution containing 4 g of sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate with a high-speed stirring emulsifier (dissolver). Water was added thereto, to prepare 900 g of an emulsified dispersion A.

Separately, the above emulsified dispersion A and the above emulsions B-H and B-L were mixed and dissolved, to prepare a coating solution for the first layer having the composition shown below. The coating amount of the emulsion is in terms of silver.

The coating solutions for the second layer to the seventh layer were prepared in the similar manner as the first-layer coating solution. As a gelatin hardener for each layer, 1-oxy-3,5-dichloro-s-triazine sodium salt (H-1), (H-2), and (H-3) were used. Further, to each layer, were added (Ab-1), (Ab-2), and (Ab-3), so that the total amounts would be 15.0 mg/m², 60.0 mg/m², and 5.0 mg/m², respectively.

Further, to the second layer, the fourth layer, and the sixth layer, was added 1-(3-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole in amounts of 0.2 mg/m², 0.2 mg/m², and 0.6 mg/m², respectively. Further, to the blue-sensitive emulsion layer and the green-sensitive emulsion layer, was added 4-hydroxy-6-methyl-1,3,3a,7-tetrazaindene in amounts of 1×10⁻⁴ mol and 2×10⁻⁴ mol, respectively, per mol of the silver halide. Further, to the red-sensitive emulsion layer, was added a copolymer latex of methacrylic acid and butyl acrylate (1:1 in mass ratio; average molecular weight, 200,000 to 400,000) in an amount of 0.05 g/m². Disodium catecol-3,5-disulfonate was added to the second layer, the fourth layer and the sixth layer so that respective amounts would be 6 mg/m², 6 mg/m² and 18 mg/m², respectively. Further, to each layer, sodium polystyrene sulfonate was optionally added to adjust viscosity of the coating solutions. Further, in order to prevent irradiation, the following dyes (coating amounts are shown in parentheses) were added. (Layer Constitution)

The composition of each layer is shown below. The numbers show coating amounts (g/m 2). With respect to silver halide emulsions, the coating amount is in terms of silver.

Support

Polyethylene Resin-Laminated Paper

• [The polyethylene resin on the first layer side contained a white pigment (TiO₂, content of 16 mass %; ZnO, content of 4 mass %), a fluorescent whitening agent (4,4′-bis(5-methylbenzoxazolyl)stilbene, content of 0.03 mass %) and a bluish dye (ultramarine, content of 0.33 mass %). The amount of the polyethylene resin was 29.2 g/m²]

First Layer (Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer)

Silver chlorobromoiodide emulsion (gold-sulfur 0.17
sensitized cubes, a 5:5 mixture of the large-size
emulsion B-H and the small-size emulsion B-L
(in terms of mol of silver))
Gelatin                          1.43
Yellow coupler (6)               0.34
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-1)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-2)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-8)   0.08
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-18)  0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-19)  0.08
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-20)  0.09
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-21)  0.01
Additive (ExC-1)                 0.001
Color-image stabilizer (UV-2)    0.01
Solvent (Solv-4)                 0.27
Solvent (Solv-6)                 0.04
Solvent (Solv-9)                 0.27

Second Layer (Color-Mixing Inhibiting Layer)

Gelatin                        0.73
Color-mixing inhibitor (Cpd-4) 0.06
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-5) 0.02
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-6) 0.04
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7) 0.01
Color-image stabilizer (UV-A)  0.04
Solvent (Solv-1)               0.02
Solvent (Solv-2)               0.02
Solvent (Solv-5)               0.08
Solvent (Solv-8)               0.09

Third Layer (Green-Sensitive Emulsion Layer)

Silver chlorobromoiodide emulsion (gold-sulfur 0.12
sensitized cubes, a 1:3 mixture of the large-size
emulsion G-H and the small-size emulsion G-L
(in terms of mol of silver))
Gelatin                          0.97
Magenta coupler (ExM)            0.12
Ultraviolet absorbing agent (UV-A) 0.06
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-2)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-6)   0.06
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-8)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-9)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-10)  0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-11)  0.0001
Solvent (Solv-3)                 0.06
Solvent (Solv-4)                 0.12
Solvent (Solv-6)                 0.05
Solvent (Solv-9)                 0.14

Fourth Layer (Color-Mixing Inhibiting Layer)

Gelatin                        0.58
Color-mixing inhibitor (Cpd-4) 0.05
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-5) 0.02
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-6) 0.03
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7) 0.02
Color-image stabilizer (UV-A)  0.03
Solvent (Solv-1)               0.02
Solvent (Solv-2)               0.06
Solvent (Solv-5)               0.07
Solvent (Solv-8)               0.07

Fifth Layer (Red-Sensitive Emulsion Layer)

Silver chlorobromoiodide emulsion (gold-sulfur 0.10
sensitized cubes, a 4:6 mixture of the large-size
emulsion R-H and the small-size emulsion R-L
(in terms of mol of silver))
Gelatin                          1.11
Cyan coupler (ExC-1)             0.12
Cyan coupler (ExC-2)             0.02
Cyan coupler (ExC-3)             0.03
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-1)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-9)   0.04
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-10)  0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-14)  0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-15)  0.17
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-16)  0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-17)  0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-18)  0.05
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-19)  0.03
Color-image stabilizer (UV-4)    0.10
Solvent (Solv-5)                 0.17

Sixth Layer (Ultraviolet Absorbing Layer)

Gelatin                          0.34
Ultraviolet absorbing agent (UV-C) 0.27
Compound (S1-4)                  0.0015
Solvent (Solv-7)                 0.09

Seventh Layer (Protective Layer)

Gelatin                       0.65
Additive (Cpd-22)             0.03
Liquid paraffin               0.02
Surface-active agent (Cpd-13) 0.02

Sample 1101 was prepared in the same manner as in the above-mentioned preparation of Sample 001, except that the composition of the first layer was changed as shown below.

Composition of the First Layer (Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer) of Sample 1101

First Layer (Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer)

Silver chlorobromoiodide emulsion (gold-sulfur 0.17
sensitized cubes, a 5:5 mixture of the
large-size emulsion B-H and the small-size
emulsion B-L (in terms of mol of silver))
Gelatin                          1.43
Yellow coupler (6) (Exemplified compound (6)) 0.34
Solvent (Solv-4)                 0.46
Solvent (Solv-9)                 0.46

Samples 1102 to 1124 were prepared in the same manner as Sample 1101, except for adding the compound represented by formula (TS-II) in an amount of 20 mole % based on the yellow coupler, and adding the compound represented by formula (Ph) in an amount of 70 mole % based on the yellow coupler. In adding these compounds, each sample was prepared in such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in the first layer would be a prescribed amount.

Two kinds of processing in which both the composition of processing solutions and the process time were different from each other were carried out, to evaluate photosensitive materials.

Processing Process A

The aforementioned photosensitive material 001 was processed into a roll with a width of 127 mm, and then a standard photographic image was exposed on the photosensitive material by means of a digital mini-lab FRONTIER 330 (trade name, manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.). Thereafter, using the exposed photosensitive material, a continuous processing (running test) was conducted until the replenisher volume of the color developer used in the processing process set forth below became twice the volume of the color developer tank.

The processing using the following running processing solution was named Processing A.

			Replenishment
Processing step	Temperature	Time	rate*
Color development	38.5°	C.	45 sec	45	ml
Bleach-fixing	38.0°	C.	45 sec	35	ml
Rinse (1)	38.0°	C.	20 sec	—
Rinse (2)	38.0°	C.	20 sec	—
Rinse (3)**	38.0°	C.	20 sec	—
Rinse (4)**	38.0°	C.	20 sec	121	ml
Drying	80°	C.
(Notes)
*Replenishment rate per m2 of the photosensitive material to be processed.
**A rinse cleaning system RC50D, trade name, manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd., was installed in the rinse (3), and the rinse solution was taken out from the rinse (3) and sent to a reverse osmosis membrane module (RC50D) by using a pump.
# The permeated water obtained in that tank was supplied to the rinse (4), and the concentrated liquid was returned to the rinse (3). Pump pressure was controlled such that the permeated water in the reverse osmosis module would be maintained in an amount of 50 to 300 ml/min, and the rinse solution was circulated under controlled temperature for 10 hours a day. The rinse was made in a four-tank counter-current system from (1) to (4).

The composition of each processing solution was as follows.

(Color developer)	(Tank solution)	(Replenisher)
water	800	ml	800	ml
Fluorescent	2.2	g	5.1	g
whitening agent
(FL-1)
Fluorescent	0.35	g	1.75	g
whitening agent
(FL-2)
Triisopropanolamine	8.8	g	8.8	g
Polyethyleneglycol	10.0	g	10.0	g
(Average molecular
weight 300)
Ethylenediamine	4.0	g	4.0	g
tetraacetic acid
Sodium sulfite	0.10	g	0.20	g
Potassium chloride	10.0	g	—
Sodium 4,5-dihydroxybenzene-1,	0.50	g	0.50	g
3-disulfonate
Disodium-N,	8.5	g	14.0	g
N-bis(sulfonatoethyl)
hydroxylamine
4-amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-	4.8	g	14.0	g
(β-methanesulfonamidoethyl)
aniline · 3/2 sulfate ·
monohydrate
Potassium carbonate	26.3	g	26.3	g
Water to make	1000	ml	1000	ml
pH (25° C., adjusted using	10.15
sulfuric acid and potassium
hydroxide)

(Bleach-fixing
solution)		(Tank solution)	(Replenisher)
Water	800	ml	800	ml
Ammonium thiosulfate	107	ml	214	ml
(750 g/l)
m-Carboxybenzenesulfinic	8.3	g	16.5	g
acid
Ammonium iron (III)	47.0	g	94.0	g
ethylenediamine tetraacetate
Ethylenediaminetetraacetic	1.4	g	2.8	g
acid
Nitric acid (67%)	16.5	g	33.0	g
Imidazole	14.6	g	29.2	g
Ammonium sulfite	16.0	g	32.0	g
Potassium metabisulfite	23.1	g	46.2	g
Water to make	1000	ml	1000	ml
pH (25° C., adjusted	6.5		6.5
using nitric acid and
aqueous ammonia)

	(Rinse solution)		(Tank solution)	(Replenisher)
	Sodium	0.02	g	0.02	g
	chlorinated-isocyanurate
	Deionized water	1000	ml	1000	ml
	(conductivity:
	5 μS/cm or less)
	pH (25° C.)	6.5		6.5

Processing Process B

The above photosensitive material Sample 001 was processed into a form of a roll with a width of 127 mm, and the photosensitive material was exposed with a standard photographic image, by using a digital Mini Lab FRONTIER 330 (trade name) manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Thereafter, a continuous processing (running test) was performed until the volume of the color-developer replenisher used in the following processing step became twice the volume of the color-developer tank. The processing using this running processing solution was named processing B.

Processing
step		Temperature		Time	Replenishment rate*
Color	45.0°	C.	17	sec	45 ml
development
Bleach-fixing	40.0°	C.	17	sec	35 ml
Rinse (1)	40.0°	C.	8	sec	—
Rinse (2)	40.0°	C.	8	sec	—
Rinse (3)**	40.0°	C.	8	sec	—
Rinse (4)**	38.0°	C.	8	sec	121 ml
Drying	80°	C.	15	sec
(Notes)
*Replenishment rate per m2 of the photosensitive
material to be processed.
**A rinse cleaning system RC50D, trade name,
manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., was
installed in the rinse (3), and the rinse solution was
taken out from the rinse (3) and sent to a reverse
osmosis membrane module (RC50D) by using a pump. The
permeated water obtained in that tank was supplied to
the rinse (4), and the concentrated water was returned
to the rinse (3). Pump pressure was controlled such
that the permeated water in the reverse osmosis module
would be maintained in an amount of 50 to 300 ml/min,
and the rinse solution was circulated under controlled
temperature for 10 hours a day. The rinse was made in
a four-tank counter-current system from (1) to (4).

The composition of each processing solution was as follows.

(Color developer)		(Tank solution)	(Replenisher)
Water	800	ml	800	ml
Fluorescent	4.0	g	8.0	g
whitening agent (FL-3)
Residual color	3.0	g	5.5	g
reducing agent (SR-1)
Triisopropanolamine	8.8	g	8.8	g
Sodium p-toluenesulfonate	10.0	g	10.0	g
Ethylenediamine	4.0	g	4.0	g
tetraacetic acid
Sodium sulfite	0.10	g	0.10	g
Potassium chloride	10.0	g	—
Sodium 4,	0.50	g	0.50	g
5-dihydroxybenzene-1,
3-disulfonate
Disodium-N,	8.5	g	14.0	g
N-bis(sulfonatoethyl)
hydroxylamine
4-amino-3-methyl-N-ethyl-N-	7.0	g	19.0	g
(β-methanesulfonamidoethyl)
aniline · 3/2 sulfate ·
monohydrate
Potassium carbonate	26.3	g	26.3	g
Water to make	1000	ml	1000	ml
pH (25° C., adjusted using	10.25		12.6
sulfuric acid and potassium
hydroxide)

	(Bleach-fixing
	solution)		(Tank solution)	(Replenisher)
	Water	800	ml	800	ml
	Ammonium thiosulfate	107	ml	214	ml
	(750 g/l)
	Succinic acid	29.5	g	59.0	g
	Ammonium iron (III)	47.0	g	94.0	g
	ethylenediaminetetraacetate
	Ethylenediaminetetraacetic	1.4	g	2.8	g
	acid
	Nitric acid (67%)	17.5	g	35.0	g
	Imidazole	14.6	g	29.2	g
	Ammonium sulfite	16.0	g	32.0	g
	Potassium metabisulfite	23.1	g	46.2	g
	Water to make	1000	ml	1000	ml
	pH (25° C., adjusted	6.00		6.00
	using nitric acid and
	aqueous ammonia)

	(Rinse solution)		(Tank solution)	(Replenisher)
	Sodium chlorinated-	0.02	g	0.02	g
	isocyanurate
	Deionized water	1000	ml	1000	ml
	(conductivity:
	5 μS/cm or less)
	pH (25° C.)	6.5		6.5

After being coated, the photosensitive material Samples 1101 to 1124 were kept for 10 days under conditions of 25° C. and 55% relative humidity, followed by the evaluation set forth below.

(Evaluation 1: Fastness to Light)

Each sample was subjected to exposure necessary to give a gray in the above-described processing process B, followed by color-development processing in the above-described processing process B.

As the light source, a semiconductor laser was used to obtain a light source at 688 nm (R light), a semiconductor laser was combined with SHG to obtain a light source at 532 nm (G light), and a light source at 473 nm (B light). The quantity of light of R light was modulated with using an outer modulator, and scanning exposure was performed to a sample moving in a direction orthogonal to the scanning direction, by reflecting these lights on a rotating polygon. The scanning exposure was performed at the density of 400 dpi and the average exposure time per 1 pixel was 8×10⁻⁸ second. The temperature of the semiconductor lasers was kept constant, with using a Peltier element, to prevent the quantity of light from being changed by temperature.

Using the thus-prepared samples, densitometry was conducted before and after exposure to a Xenon lamp of 100,000 lux for 14 days. The surface temperature of the photosensitive materials was adjusted to become 50° C. A relative residual rate (%) after reservation was calculated for a yellow color-developing area of an initial density of 0.3. Further, the yellow density before and after irradiation of light, at an unexposed area, was also measured, to calculate the change of stain (ΔDmin).

The results obtained are shown in Table 2.

	TABLE 2
	Light fastness
		Compound	Compound	Relative
Sample		of formula	of formula	residual
No.	Coupler	(TS-II)	(Ph)	rate (%)	ΔDmin
1101	6	—	—	38	0.020
1102	6	(TII-16)	—	57	0.006
1103	6	(TII-17)	—	50	0.008
1104	6	(TII-29)	—	50	0.008
1105	6	—	(A-101)	57	0.019
1106	6	—	(A-130)	51	0.02
1107	6	—	(A-87)	55	0.02
1108	6	—	(A-22)	70	0.019
1109	6	—	(A-12)	68	0.019
1110	6	(TII-16)	(A-101)	67	0.004
1111	6	(TII-16)	(A-130)	62	0.004
1112	6	(TII-16)	(A-87)	65	0.004
1113	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	85	0.004
1114	6	(TII-16)	(A-12)	83	0.004
1115	6	(TII-17)	(A-101)	63	0.006
1116	6	(TII-17)	(A-130)	59	0.006
1117	6	(TII-17)	(A-87)	61	0.006
1118	6	(TII-17)	(A-22)	80	0.006
1119	6	(TII-17)	(A-12)	77	0.006
1120	6	(TII-29)	(A-101)	63	0.006
1121	6	(TII-29)	(A-130)	59	0.006
1122	6	(TII-29)	(A-87)	61	0.006
1123	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	80	0.006
1124	6	(TII-29)	(A-12)	77	0.006

It can be seen that the compounds represented by formula (Ph) exhibited effects of improving photo fading of a yellow dye, but exhibited almost no effect of improving photo stain. Further, the compounds represented by formula (TS-II) exhibited effects of improving both photo fading and photo stain. Moreover, the level of reducing photo fading and occurence of photo stain, were further improved by combined use of these two kinds of compounds, compared with single use of these compounds.

Example 2

Samples 1201 to 1232 were prepared in the same manner as samples 1113 and 1123 in Example 1, except for further adding color image-stabilizers in addition to the compounds according to the present invention, as shown in Table 3. The amount of the additional compounds was to achieve 20% of the yellow coupler respectively. In this addition of the additional compounds, each sample was prepared in such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in the first layer became a fixed quantity.

Similarly to Example 1, fastness to light of these samples was evaluated. The results obtained are shown in Table 3.

TABLE 3
					Light
				Other	fastness
		Compound	Compound	color-	Relative
Sample		of formula	of formula	image	residual
No.	Coupler	(TS-II)	(Ph)	stabilizer	rate (%)	Remarks
1113	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	—	85	This
						invention
1201	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	B-17	90	This
						invention
1202	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	B-21	88	This
						invention
1203	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	TI-17	88	This
						invention
1204	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	TII-16	88	This
						invention
1205	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	TIV-12	88	This
						invention
1206	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	TV-4	87	This
						invention
1207	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	TVI-23	89	This
						invention
1208	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	TVII-1	88	This
						invention
1209	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	TVII-19	88	This
						invention
1210	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	UA-5	88	This
						invention
1211	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	UB-3	87	This
						invention
1212	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	UC-2	87	This
						invention
1213	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	UD-7	87	This
						invention
1214	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	UE-2	88	This
						invention
1215	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	P-2	88	This
						invention
1216	6	(TII-16)	(A-22)	TIV-12	92	This
				TVI-23		invention
				TVII-19
				UA-5
1123	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	—	80	This
						invention
1217	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	B-17	85	This
						invention
1218	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	B-21	83	This
						invention
1219	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	TI-17	83	This
						invention
1220	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	TII-16	83	This
						invention
1221	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	TIV-12	83	This
						invention
1222	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	TV-4	82	This
						invention
1223	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	TVI-23	84	This
						invention
1224	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	TVII-1	83	This
						invention
1225	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	TVII-19	83	This
						invention
1226	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	UA-5	83	This
						invention
1227	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	UB-3	82	This
						invention
1228	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	UC-2	82	This
						invention
1229	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	UD-7	82	This
						invention
1230	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	UE-2	83	This
						invention
1231	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	P-2	83	This
						invention
1232	6	(TII-29)	(A-22)	TIV-12	88	This
				TVI-23		invention
				TVII-19
				UA-5

It can be seen that fastness to light was further improved when any one or more of the following compounds: the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3), the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) and (TS-III) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultraviolet absorbing agent, and the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer; was used, together with a combination of the compound represented by formula (Ph) and the compound represented by formula (TS-II).

Example 3

Samples 1301 to 1306 were prepared in the same manner as Sample 1216 in Example 2, except for replacing the yellow coupler in the first layer with the respective yellow couplers shown in Table 4. The yellow couplers were changed in an equivalent molar amount respectively. Similarly to Example 1, photo fading of these samples was evaluated. The results obtained are shown in Table 4.

TABLE 4
		Light fastness
		Relative residual
Sample No.	Coupler	rate (%)
1216	6	92
1301	7	85
1302	8	88
1303	17	83
1304	19	76
1305	21	65
1306	22	63

It can be seen that the samples using yellow couplers according to the present invention, in which the structure of the yellow coupler had an alkylthio group or an arylthio group at the ortho-position to the —CONH— group, were excellent in fastness to light. Among them, the samples using yellow couplers according to the present invention, in which the structure of the yellow coupler had an alkylthio group at the ortho-position to the —CONH— group, were more excellent in fastness to light. Moreover, the sample using the yellow coupler according to the present invention, in which the structure of the yellow coupler also had a t-butyl group at the para-position to the alkylthio group, was even more excellent in fastness to light.

Example 4

Samples were prepared in the same manner as Sample 001 and the samples in Examples 1 to 3, except that the amount of the solvents in the first layer was reduced so that the total amount of hydrophobic additives became 67%, and the amount of gelatin was reduced to 67%. The same evaluation as in Example 1 was conducted. The thus-obtained results demonstrate that fastness to light was improved by a combination of the yellow coupler according to the present invention and the compounds according to the present invention.

Example 5

Samples were prepared in the same manner as those in Example 3, except that the ultraviolet-absorbing agent in the second layer, the third layer and the fourth layer was changed from (UV-A) to (UV-B). The same evaluation as in Example 1 was conducted, and then essentially the same results were obtained.

Example 6

Samples were prepared in the same manner as Sample 001 and the samples in Examples 1, 2 and 4, except that the ultraviolet-absorbing agent in the second layer, the third layer and the fourth layer was changed from (UV-A) to (UV-B). The same evaluation as in Example 1 was conducted. The thus-obtained results demonstrate that fastness to light was improved by a combination of the yellow coupler according to the present invention and the compounds according to the present invention.

Example 7

Samples were prepared in the same manner as the samples in Example 3, except for replacing (Cpd-4) in the second layer and the fourth layer with (Cpd-12) in an equivalent molar amount. The same evaluation as in Example 1 was conducted. The thus-obtained results confirmed that fastness to light was improved by a combination of the yellow coupler according to the present invention and the compounds according to the present invention. In addition, the effects were particularly remarkable.

Example 8

Samples were prepared in the same manner as the samples in Example 7, except for replacing the support used in Example 7 with a 175-μm thick PET reflection-type support in which barium sulfate was added and kneaded. The same evaluation as in Example 1 was conducted and essentially the same results were obtained.

Example 9

Each sample prepared in Examples 1 to 8 was scan-exposed, by means of each exposure apparatus set forth bellow, and processed according to processing process A. The same evaluation of fastness to light as in Example 1 was conducted. The thus-obtained results demonstrate that each sample according to the present invention was excellent in fastness to light, regardless of the kind of exposure apparatus used.

Exposure Apparatus

Digital mini-lab FRONTIER 330 (trade name, manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.)

Lambda 130 (trade name, manufactured by Durst Co.)

LIGHTJET 5000 (trade name, manufactured by Gretag Co.)

Example 10

Samples were prepared in the same manner as the samples in Example 3, except for changing the composition as set forth below.

Coating amount of the blue-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer: 240%

Coating amount of the green-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer: 250%

Coating amount of the red-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer: 260%

Support: 180 μm-thick polyethylene terephthalate transparent support

Each of these samples was processed according to processing process B in Example 1. However, in this processing process B, each of the processing steps was prolonged by 2.7 times. The same evaluation as in Example 1 was conducted. The thus-obtained results demonstrate that a combination use of the yellow coupler according to the present invention and the compounds according to the present invention, was excellent in image fastness.

Example 11

Samples 2101 were prepared in the same manner as Sample 001 prepared in the above-described Example 1, except that the composition of the first layer was changed as follows.

Composition of the First Layer (Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer) of Sample 2101

First Layer (Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer)

Silver chlorobromoiodide emulsion (gold-sulfur 0.17
sensitized cubes, a 5:5 mixture of the large-size
emulsion B-H and the small-size emulsion B-L
(in terms of mol of silver))
Gelatin                          1.43
Yellow coupler (Coupler for comparison 1) 0.34
Solvent (Solv-4)                 0.46
Solvent (Solv-9)                 0.46

Samples 2102 to 2167 were prepared in the same manner as Sample 2101, except for replacing the coupler with those set forth in Table 5 and adding the discoloration (fading) inhibitor to the first layer as set forth in Table 5. The coupler was replaced in an equivalent molar amount to that in Sample 2101. Further, the amount of the inhibitor to be added was set to 70 mole % of the coupler. In this connection, the samples were prepared in such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in the first layer became a fixed quantity.

After being coated, the photosensitive material Samples 2101 to 2167 were kept for 10 days under conditions of 25° C. and 55% RH, followed by the evaluation set forth below.

(Evaluation 2: Fastness to Light)

Each sample was subjected to exposure necessary to give a gray image in the above-described processing process B, followed by color development in the above-described processing processes A and B.

As a light source, a semiconductor laser was used to obtain a light source at 688 nm (R light), a semiconductor laser was combined with SHG to obtain a light source at 532 nm (G light) and a light source at 473 nm (B light). The quantity of R light was modulated with using an outer modulator, and scanning exposure was performed to a sample moving in a direction orthogonal to the scanning direction, by reflecting the three lights on a rotating polygon. The scanning exposure was performed at the density of 400 dpi and the average exposure time per 1 pixel was 8×10⁻⁸ second. The temperature of the semiconductor laser was kept constant, with using a Peltier element, in order to prevent quantity of light from changing by temperature.

Using the thus-prepared samples, densitometry was conducted before and after exposure to a Xenon lamp of 100,000 lux for 14 days. The surface temperature of the photosensitive material was adjusted to become 50° C. A relative residual rate (%) after reservation was calculated for a yellow color-developing area of the initial density of 0.3.

The results obtained by evaluating the samples processed according to processing process B are shown in Table 5. Further, the samples processed according to processing process A showed essentially the same results as the samples processed according to processing process B.

TABLE 5
Sample			Relative
No.	Coupler	Inhibitor	residual rate (%)
2101	Coupler for comparison 1	—	15
2102	Coupler for comparison 1	A-101	32
2103	Coupler for comparison 1	A-114	32
2104	Coupler for comparison 1	A-84	30
2105	Coupler for comparison 1	A-130	28
2106	Coupler for comparison 1	A-22	37
2107	Coupler for comparison 1	A-12	36
2108	Coupler for comparison 2	—	22
2109	Coupler for comparison 2	A-101	38
2110	Coupler for comparison 2	A-114	38
2111	Coupler for comparison 2	A-84	37
2112	Coupler for comparison 2	A-130	35
2113	Coupler for comparison 2	A-22	43
2114	Coupler for comparison 2	A-12	42
2115	Coupler for comparison 3	—	23
2116	Coupler for comparison 3	A-101	39
2117	Coupler for comparison 3	A-114	39
2118	Coupler for comparison 3	A-84	37
2119	Coupler for comparison 3	A-130	36
2120	Coupler for comparison 3	A-22	44
2121	Coupler for comparison 3	A-12	43
2122	102	—	38
2123	102	A-101	57
2124	102	A-114	57
2125	102	A-125	57
2126	102	A-129	51
2127	102	A-130	52
2128	102	A-83	55
2129	102	A-84	55
2130	102	A-85	55
2131	102	A-90	55
2132	102	A-22	70
2133	102	A-40	69
2134	102	A-21	60
2135	102	A-12	68
2136	102	A-4	59
2137	102	A-3	63
2138	102	A-7	65
2139	102	A-35	62
2140	102	A-44	61
2141	102	A-55	61
2142	102	A-30	61
2143	102	A-28	61
2144	102	A-58	61
2145	102	A-60	61
2146	102	A-61	61
2147	104	—	35
2148	104	A-101	54
2149	104	A-114	54
2150	104	A-84	52
2151	104	A-130	52
2152	104	A-22	68
2153	104	A-12	67
2154	113	—	36
2155	113	A-101	55
2156	113	A-114	55
2157	113	A-84	54
2158	113	A-130	53
2159	113	A-22	69
2160	113	A-12	68
2161	101	—	34
2162	101	A-101	53
2163	101	A-114	53
2164	101	A-84	51
2165	101	A-130	51
2166	101	A-22	67
2167	101	A-12	66

The results in Table 5 clearly show that addition of the compound represented by formula (Ph), to the samples, enabled remarkably improved fastness, compared with samples free of the said compounds. In addition, it can be seen that a combination of the coupler represented by formula (Ia) and the inhibitors for use in the present invention provided particularly excellent fastness.

Further, it can be seen from comparing, for example, Samples 2123 to 2130 with samples 2132 to 2146, that the compound represented by formula (Ph-1), in which R_b6 was an aliphatic group, among the compounds for use in the present invention, showed a particularly high relative residual rate, leading to higher image fastness. Further, it can be seen from comparing, for example, sample 2135 with sample 2137, that when the total of carbon atoms of R_b6 was 12 or more, the relative residual rate was higher, leading to higher image fastness, compared with when the total of carbon atoms of R_b6 was 11 or less. Further, it can be seen from comparing, for example, sample 2132 with sample 2136, that when R_b6 was a branched-chain group, the relative residual rate was higher, leading to higher image fastness, compared with when R_b6 was a straight chain group.

In addition, it can be seen that samples 2102, 2109, 2116, 2123, 2148, 2155, and 2162, employing A-101 as a discoloration inhibitor, were high in relative residual rate, but gave rise to cyan color turbidity (color contamination).

Example 12

Samples 2201 to 2218 were prepared in the same manner as samples 2123, 2124, 2129, 2132, 2135 and 2137 in Example 11, except that the respective compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) set forth in Table 6 were additionally incorporated in the first layer. The compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) was added in an amount to be 20 mole % based on the magenta coupler. In adding these compounds, each sample was prepared using such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in the first layer became a fixed quantity.

TABLE 6
			Compound
			of formula	Relative
Sample			(E-1), (E-2)	residual
No.	Coupler	Inhibitor	or (E-3)	rate (%)	Remarks
2123	(102)	A-101	—	57	This
					invention
2201	(102)	A-101	B-17	63	This
					invention
2202	(102)	A-101	B-13	62	This
					invention
2203	(102)	A-101	B-21	62	This
					invention
2124	(102)	A-114	—	57	This
					invention
2204	(102)	A-114	B-17	63	This
					invention
2205	(102)	A-114	B-13	62	This
					invention
2206	(102)	A-114	B-21	62	This
					invention
2129	(102)	A-84	—	55	This
					invention
2207	(102)	A-84	B-17	60	This
					invention
2208	(102)	A-84	B-13	59	This
					invention
2209	(102)	A-84	B-21	59	This
					invention
2132	(102)	A-22	—	70	This
					invention
2210	(102)	A-22	B-17	77	This
					invention
2211	(102)	A-22	B-13	76	This
					invention
2212	(102)	A-22	B-21	76	This
					invention
2135	(102)	A-12	—	68	This
					invention
2213	(102)	A-12	B-17	75	This
					invention
2214	(102)	A-12	B-13	74	This
					invention
2215	(102)	A-12	B-21	74	This
					invention
2137	(102)	A-3	—	63	This
					invention
2216	(102)	A-3	B-17	69	This
					invention
2217	(102)	A-3	B-13	69	This
					invention
2218	(102)	A-3	B-21	69	This
					invention

Similarly to Example 11, each sample was subjected to exposure to light, and a development processing, and fastness to light was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 11.

The results in Table 6 clearly show that supplementary addition of the compound represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) further improved image fastness. In particular, it can be seen that a combination of the above-said compound and the compound represented by formula (Ph-1) improved image fastness more effectively.

In addition, it can be seen that Samples 2201 to 2203 employing A-101 as a discoloration inhibitor were high in image fastness, but gave rise to cyan color turbidity.

Example 13

Samples 2301 to 2374 were prepared in the same manner as samples 2201, 2204, 2207, 2210 and 2213 in Example 12, except that the respective other discoloration inhibitor set forth in Table 7 were additionally incorporated in the first layer. The amount of the other discoloration inhibitor was added so as to become 20 mole % based on the coupler. In this occasion, each sample was prepared using such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in the first layer became a fixed quantity.

TABLE 7
			Compound
			of formula		Relative
Sample			(E-1), (E-2)	Other	residual
No.	Coupler	Inhibitor	or (E-3)	inhibitor	rate (%)	Remarks
2201	(102)	A-101	B-17	—	63	This
						invention
2301	(102)	A-101	B-17	TI-17	66	This
						invention
2302	(102)	A-101	B-17	TII-24	67	This
						invention
2303	(102)	A-101	B-17	TIII-15	65	This
						invention
2304	(102)	A-101	B-17	TIV-12	66	This
						invention
2305	(102)	A-101	B-17	TV-4	65	This
						invention
2306	(102)	A-101	B-17	TVI-23	66	This
						invention
2307	(102)	A-101	B-17	TVIII-1	65	This
						invention
2308	(102)	A-101	B-17	TVII-19	66	This
						invention
2309	(102)	A-101	B-17	UA-5	66	This
						invention
2310	(102)	A-101	B-17	UB-3	65	This
						invention
2311	(102)	A-101	B-17	UC-2	65	This
						invention
2312	(102)	A-101	B-17	UD-7	65	This
						invention
2313	(102)	A-101	B-17	UE-2	66	This
						invention
2314	(102)	A-101	B-17	P-2	65	This
						invention
2204	(102)	A-114	B-17	—	63	This
						invention
2315	(102)	A-114	B-17	TI-17	66	This
						invention
2316	(102)	A-114	B-17	TII-24	67	This
						invention
2317	(102)	A-114	B-17	TIII-15	65	This
						invention
2318	(102)	A-114	B-17	TIV-12	66	This
						invention
2319	(102)	A-114	B-17	TV-4	65	This
						invention
2320	(102)	A-114	B-17	TVI-23	66	This
						invention
2321	(102)	A-114	B-17	TVIII-1	65	This
						invention
2322	(102)	A-114	B-17	TVII-19	66	This
						invention
2323	(102)	A-114	B-17	UA-5	66	This
						invention
2324	(102)	A-114	B-17	UB-3	65	This
						invention
2325	(102)	A-114	B-17	UC-2	65	This
						invention
2326	(102)	A-114	B-17	UD-7	65	This
						invention
2327	(102)	A-114	B-17	UE-2	66	This
						invention
2328	(102)	A-114	B-17	P-2	65	This
						invention
2207	(102)	A-84	B-17	—	60	This
						invention
2329	(102)	A-84	B-17	TI-17	63	This
						invention
2330	(102)	A-84	B-17	TII-24	64	This
						invention
2331	(102)	A-84	B-17	TIII-15	62	This
						invention
2332	(102)	A-84	B-17	TIV-12	63	This
						invention
2333	(102)	A-84	B-17	TV-4	62	This
						invention
2334	(102)	A-84	B-17	TVI-23	63	This
						invention
2335	(102)	A-84	B-17	TVIII-1	62	This
						invention
2336	(102)	A-84	B-17	TVII-19	63	This
						invention
2337	(102)	A-84	B-17	UA-5	62	This
						invention
2338	(102)	A-84	B-17	UB-3	62	This
						invention
2339	(102)	A-84	B-17	UC-2	62	This
						invention
2340	(102)	A-84	B-17	UD-7	62	This
						invention
2341	(102)	A-84	B-17	UE-2	63	This
						invention
2342	(102)	A-84	B-17	P-2	62	This
						invention
2210	(102)	A-22	B-17	—	77	This
						invention
2343	(102)	A-22	B-17	TI-17	82	This
						invention
2344	(102)	A-22	B-17	TII-24	85	This
						invention
2345	(102)	A-22	B-17	TIII-15	82	This
						invention
2346	(102)	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	83	This
						invention
2347	(102)	A-22	B-17	TV-4	82	This
						invention
2348	(102)	A-22	B-17	TVI-23	83	This
						invention
2349	(102)	A-22	B-17	TVIII-1	82	This
						invention
2350	(102)	A-22	B-17	TVII-19	83	This
						invention
2351	(102)	A-22	B-17	UA-5	83	This
						invention
2352	(102)	A-22	B-17	UB-3	82	This
						invention
2353	(102)	A-22	B-17	UC-2	82	This
						invention
2354	(102)	A-22	B-17	UD-7	82	This
						invention
2355	(102)	A-22	B-17	UE-2	83	This
						invention
2356	(102)	A-22	B-17	P-2	82	This
						invention
2357	(102)	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	87	This
				TVI-23		invention
				TVII-19
				UA-5
2358	(102)	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	92	This
				TVI-23		invention
				TVII-19
				UA-5
				TII-24
2213	(102)	A-12	B-17	—	75	This
						invention
2359	(102)	A-12	B-17	TI-17	80	This
						invention
2360	(102)	A-12	B-17	TII-24	83	This
						invention
2361	(102)	A-12	B-17	TIII-15	80	This
						invention
2362	(102)	A-12	B-17	TIV-12	81	This
						invention
2363	(102)	A-12	B-17	TV-4	80	This
						invention
2364	(102)	A-12	B-17	TVI-23	81	This
						invention
2365	(102)	A-12	B-17	TVIII-1	80	This
						invention
2366	(102)	A-12	B-17	TVII-19	81	This
						invention
2367	(102)	A-12	B-17	UA-5	81	This
						invention
2368	(102)	A-12	B-17	UB-3	80	This
						invention
2369	(102)	A-12	B-17	UC-2	80	This
						invention
2370	(102)	A-12	B-17	UD-7	80	This
						invention
2371	(102)	A-12	B-17	UE-2	81	This
						invention
2372	(102)	A-12	B-17	P-2	80	This
						invention
2373	(102)	A-12	B-17	TIV-12	85	This
				TVI-23		invention
				TVII-19
				UA-5
2374	(102)	A-12	B-17	TIV-12	90	This
				TVI-23		invention
				TVII-19
				UA-5
				TII-24

Similarly to Example 11, each sample was subjected to exposure to light, and a development processing, and fastness to light was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 11.

The results in Table 7 clearly show that supplementary addition of one or more of: the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultraviolet absorbing agent, and the water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, further improved image fastness. In particular, it can be seen that a combination use of at least one of the above compounds and the compound represented by formula (Ph) for use in the present invention enabled more effectively improved image fastness.

Example 14

Samples were prepared in the same manner as samples 2101 to 2167 of Example 11, samples 2201 to 2218 of Example 12, and samples 2301 to 2374 of Example 13, except that the kind of the ultraviolet-ray absorbing agent in the second layer, the third layer and the forth layer was changed from (UV-A) to (UV-B). The same evaluation as in Example 11 was carried out, and essentially the same results were obtained.

Example 15

Samples were prepared in the same manner as samples 2101 to 2167 of Example 11, samples 2201 to 2218 of Example 12, and samples 2301 to 2374 of Example 13, except that (Cpd-4) of the second layer and the forth layer was replaced with an equivalent molar amount of (Cpd-12) respectively. The same evaluation as in Example 11 was carried out, and improvement of fastness to light, owing to combined use of the coupler and the additive(s) for use in the present invention, was confirmed. The resulted effects were particularly remarkable.

Example 16

Samples were prepared in the same manner as samples in Example 15, except that the support was replaced with a PET reflection support of 175 μm thickness, in which PET was kneaded with barium sulfate. An evaluation according to Example 11 was carried out, and essentially the same results were obtained.

Example 17

Samples 2101 to 2167 of Example 11, samples 2201 to 2218 of Example 12, and samples 2301 to 2374 of Example 13 were scan-exposed by means of each exposure apparatus set forth bellow. An evaluation according to Example 11 was conducted. The thus-obtained results demonstrate that each sample according to the present invention exhibited the effects of the invention of excellent fastness to light and processing stability, regardless of the kind of exposure apparatus used.

Exposure Apparatus

Digital mini-lab FRONTIER 330 (trade name, manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.)

Lambda 130 (trade name, manufactured by Durst Co.)

LIGHTJET 5000 (trade name, manufactured by Gretag Co.)

Example 18

Samples were prepared in the same manner as the samples in Example 11, except for changing the composition as set forth below.

Coating amount of the blue-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer: 240%

Coating amount of the green-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer: 250%

Coating amount of the red-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer: 260%

Support: 180 μm thick polyethylene terephthalate transparent support

Each of these samples was processed according to processing process B in Example 1. However, in this processing process B, each of the processing steps was prolonged by 2.7 times. The same evaluation as in Example 11 was conducted. The thus-obtained results demonstrate that use of the yellow coupler according to the present invention, and the additive(s) according to the present invention, in combination, gave photosensitive materials excellent in image fastness.

Example 19

(Preparation of a Coating Solution for the Third Layer)

Into 13 g of a solvent (Solv-3), 25.9 g of a solvent (Solv-4), 10.8 g of a solvent (Solv-6), 30.2 g of a solvent (Solv-9) and 60 ml of ethyl acetate were dissolved 25.9 g of a magenta coupler (ExM), 13.0 g of a ultraviolet absorbing agent (UV-A), 2.2 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-2), 13.0 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-6), 2.2 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7), 2.2 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-8), 2.2 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-9), 2.2 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-10), 0.02 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-11), and 2.2 g of a color-image stabilizer (Cpd-20). This solution was emulsified and dispersed in 345 g of a 20 mass % aqueous gelatin solution containing 7.5 g of sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate with a high-speed stirring emulsifier (dissolver). Water was added thereto, to prepare 900 g of an emulsified dispersion A1.

Separately, the above emulsified dispersion A1 and the above emulsions G-H and G-L were mixed and dissolved, and the third-layer coating solution was prepared so that it would have the composition shown below. The coating amount of the emulsion is in terms of silver.

The coating solutions for the first layer, the second layer, and the fourth to the seventh layer were prepared in the similar manner as that for the third-layer coating solution. As a gelatin hardener for each layer, 1-oxy-3,5-dichloro-s-triazine sodium salt (H-1), (H-2), and (H-3) were used. Further, to each layer, were added (Ab-1), (Ab-2), and (Ab-3), so that the total amounts would be 15.0 mg/m², 60.0 mg/m², and 5.0 mg/m² respectively.

Further, to the second layer, the fourth layer, and the sixth layer, was added 1-(3-methylureidophenyl)-5-mercaptotetrazole in amounts of 0.2 mg/m², 0.2 mg/m², and 0.6 mg/m², respectively. Further, to the blue-sensitive emulsion layer and the green-sensitive emulsion layer, was added 4-hydroxy-6-methyl-1,3,3a,7-tetrazaindene in amounts of 1×10⁻⁴ mol and 2×10⁻⁴ mol, respectively, per mol of the silver halide. Further, to the red-sensitive emulsion layer, was added a copolymer latex of methacrylic acid and butyl acrylate (1:1 in mass ratio; average molecular weight, 200,000 to 400,000) in an amount of 0.05 g/m². Disodium catecol-3,5-disulfonate was added to the second layer, the fourth layer and the sixth layer so that coating amounts would be 6 mg/m², 6 mg/m² and 18 mg/m², respectively. Further, to each layer, sodium polystyrene sulfonate was optionally added to adjust viscosity of the coating liquid. Further, in order to prevent irradiation, the following dyes (coating amounts are shown in parentheses) were added. (Layer Constitution)

The composition of each layer is shown below. The numbers show coating amounts (g/m²). With respect to silver halide emulsions, the coating amount is in terms of silver.

Support

Polyethylene Resin-Laminated Paper

• [The polyethylene resin on the first layer side contained a white pigment (TiO₂, content of 16 mass %; ZnO, content of 4 mass %), a fluorescent whitening agent (4,4′-bis(5-methylbenzoxazolyl)stilbene, content of 0.03 mass %) and a bluish dye (ultramarine, content of 0.33 mass %). The amount of the polyethylene resin was 29.2 g/m²]

First Layer (Blue-Sensitive Emulsion Layer)

Silver chlorobromoiodide emulsion (gold-sulfur 0.17
sensitized cubes, a 5:5 mixture of the large-size
emulsion B-H and the small-size emulsion B-L
(in terms of mol of silver))
Gelatin                          1.43
Yellow coupler (ExY)             0.34
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-1)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-2)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-8)   0.08
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-18)  0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-19)  0.08
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-20)  0.09
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-21)  0.01
Additive (ExC-1)                 0.001
Color-image stabilizer (UV-2)    0.01
Solvent (Solv-4)                 0.27
Solvent (Solv-6)                 0.04
Solvent (Solv-9)                 0.27

Second Layer (Color-Mixing Inhibiting Layer)

Gelatin                        0.73
Color-mixing inhibitor (Cpd-4) 0.06
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-5) 0.02
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-6) 0.04
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7) 0.01
Color-image stabilizer (UV-A)  0.04
Solvent (Solv-1)               0.02
Solvent (Solv-2)               0.02
Solvent (Solv-5)               0.08
Solvent (Solv-8)               0.09

Third Layer (Green-Sensitive Emulsion Layer)

Silver chlorobromoiodide emulsion (gold-sulfur 0.12
sensitized cubes, a 1:3 mixture of the large-size
emulsion G-H and the small-size emulsion G-L
(in terms of mol of silver))
Gelatin                          0.97
Magenta coupler (ExM)            0.12
Ultraviolet absorbing agent (UV-A) 0.06
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-2)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-6)   0.06
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-8)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-9)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-10)  0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-11)  0.0001
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-20)  0.01
Solvent (Solv-3)                 0.06
Solvent (Solv-4)                 0.12
Solvent (Solv-6)                 0.05
Solvent (Solv-9)                 0.14

Fourth Layer (Color-Mixing Inhibiting Layer)

Gelatin                        0.58
Color-mixing inhibitor (Cpd-4) 0.05
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-5) 0.02
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-6) 0.03
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7) 0.02
Color-image stabilizer (UV-A)  0.03
Solvent (Solv-1)               0.02
Solvent (Solv-2)               0.06
Solvent (Solv-5)               0.07
Solvent (Solv-8)               0.07

Fifth Layer (Red-Sensitive Emulsion Layer)

Silver chlorobromoiodide emulsion (gold-sulfur 0.10
sensitized cubes, a 4:6 mixture of the large-size
emulsion R-H and the small-size emulsion R-L
(in terms of mol of silver))
Gelatin                          1.11
Cyan coupler (ExC-1)             0.12
Cyan coupler (ExC-2)             0.02
Cyan coupler (ExC-3)             0.03
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-1)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-7)   0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-9)   0.04
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-10)  0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-14)  0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-15)  0.17
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-16)  0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-17)  0.01
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-18)  0.05
Color-image stabilizer (Cpd-19)  0.03
Color-image stabilizer (UV-4)    0.10
Solvent (Solv-5)                 0.17

Sixth Layer (Ultraviolet Absorbing Layer)

Gelatin                          0.34
Ultraviolet absorbing agent (UV-C) 0.27
Compound (S1-4)                  0.0015
Solvent (Solv-7)                 0.09

Seventh Layer (Protective Layer)

Gelatin                       0.65
Additive (Cpd-22)             0.03
Liquid paraffin               0.02
Surface-active agent (Cpd-13) 0.02

• • (ExY) Yellow Coupler

Sample 3101 was prepared in the same manner as in the above-mentioned preparation of the sample 001A, except that the composition of the third layer was changed as follows.

Composition of the Third Layer (Green-Sensitive Emulsion Layer) of Sample 3101

Third Layer (Green-Sensitive Emulsion Layer)

Silver chlorobromoiodide emulsion (gold-sulfur 0.12
sensitized cubes, a 1:3 mixture of the large-size
emulsion G-H and the small-size emulsion G-L
(in terms of mol of silver))
Gelatin                          0.97
Magenta coupler (Exemplified compound (M-10-98)) 0.12
Solvent (Solv-3)                 0.06
Solvent (Solv-4)                 0.12
Solvent (Solv-6)                 0.05
Solvent (Solv-9)                 0.14

Samples 3102 to 3188 were prepared in the same manner as sample 3101, except that the magenta coupler was replaced with the respective couplers, as set forth in Table 8, in an equivalent molar amount, and that the compound represented by any one of formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-3), and (Ph-4) for use in the present invention, as set forth in Table 8, was added. The compounds represented by any one of formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-3), and (Ph-4) for use in the present invention were added in the proportion of 70 mole % based on the magenta coupler. In adding the compounds, each sample was prepared using such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in the third layer became a fixed quantity.

After being coated, the photosensitive material samples 3101 to 3188 were kept for 10 days under conditions of 25° C. and 55% RH, followed by the evaluation set forth below.

(Evaluation 3: Fastness to Light)

Each sample was subjected to exposure necessary to give a gray in the above-described processing process A, followed by color development in the above-described processing process A.

As the light source, a semiconductor laser was used to obtain a light source at 688 nm (R light), a semiconductor laser was combined with SHG to obtain a light source at 532 nm (G light) and a light source at 473 nm (B light). The quantity of the R light was modulated with using an outer modulator, and scanning exposure was performed to a sample moving in a direction orthogonal to the scanning direction, by reflecting these lights on a rotating polygon. The scanning exposure was performed at the density of 400 dpi and the average exposure time per 1 pixel was 8×10⁻⁸ second. The temperature of the semiconductor laser was kept constant, with using a Peltier element, in order to prevent the change in quantity of light due to change in temperature.

Using the thus-prepared samples, densitometry was conducted before and after exposure to a Xenon lamp of 100000 lux for 21 days. The surface temperature of the photosensitive material was adjusted to become 50° C. A relative residual rate (%) after reservation was calculated for a magenta color-developing area of an initial density of 0.3.

(Evaluation 4: Processing Stability in Rapid Processing)

An exposure condition to give a gray gradation in processing process B was determined for each sample, using the same exposure apparatus as in Evaluation 3. The thus-exposed samples were processed according to process C, which was the same as process B, except that the conveying rate was 1.5 times that of process B. The density of each sample obtained by processing process C was measured at an exposed area that would give a density of 2.0 if processed according to processing process B. The change in magenta density (ΔM) of processing process C compared with processing process B, was calculated.

The results of evaluation are shown in Table 8. The above ΔM values are shown under “ΔDmax” in the table.

	TABLE 8
				Relative
	Sample			residual
	No.	Coupler	Inhibitor	rate (%)	ΔDmax
	3101	M-10-98	—	32	0.1
	3102	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	45	0.4
			comparison 1
	3103	M-10-98	A-22	63	0.1
	3104	M-10-98	A-12	60	0.1
	3105	M-10-98	A-3	55	0.1
	3106	M-10-98	A-4	57	0.1
	3107	M-10-98	A-35	53	0.1
	3108	M-10-98	A-44	53	0.1
	3109	M-10-98	A-55	53	0.1
	3110	M-10-98	A-28	53	0.1
	3111	M-10-98	A-84	50	0.2
	3112	M-10-98	A-90	48	0.2
	3113	M-10-98	A-129	48	0.2
	3114	M-10-98	A-130	48	0.2
	3115	M-10-98	A-134	48	0.2
	3116	M-10-98	A-132	48	0.2
	3117	M-1-1	—	26	0.1
	3118	M-1-1	Inhibitor for	39	0.4
			comparison 1
	3119	M-1-1	A-22	57	0.1
	3120	M-1-1	A-12	54	0.1
	3121	M-1-1	A-44	47	0.1
	3122	M-1-1	A-84	44	0.2
	3123	M-1-1	A-90	42	0.2
	3124	M-1-1	A-129	42	0.2
	3125	M-2-2	—	29	0.1
	3126	M-2-2	Inhibitor for	42	0.4
			comparison 1
	3127	M-2-2	A-22	60	0.1
	3128	M-2-2	A-12	57	0.1
	3129	M-2-2	A-44	50	0.1
	3130	M-2-2	A-84	47	0.2
	3131	M-2-2	A-90	45	0.2
	3132	M-2-2	A-129	45	0.2
	3133	M-3-15	—	25	0.1
	3134	M-3-15	Inhibitor for	38	0.4
			comparison 1
	3135	M-3-15	A-22	56	0.1
	3136	M-3-15	A-12	53	0.1
	3137	M-3-15	A-44	46	0.1
	3138	M-3-15	A-84	43	0.2
	3139	M-3-15	A-90	41	0.2
	3140	M-3-15	A-129	41	0.2
	3141	M-4-7	—	27	0.1
	3142	M-4-7	Inhibitor for	40	0.4
			comparison 1
	3143	M-4-7	A-22	58	0.1
	3144	M-4-7	A-12	55	0.1
	3145	M-4-7	A-44	48	0.1
	3146	M-4-7	A-84	45	0.2
	3147	M-4-7	A-90	43	0.2
	3148	M-4-7	A-129	43	0.2
	3149	M-5-23	—	28	0.1
	3150	M-5-23	Inhibitor for	41	0.4
			comparison 1
	3151	M-5-23	A-22	59	0.1
	3152	M-5-23	A-12	56	0.1
	3153	M-5-23	A-44	49	0.1
	3154	M-5-23	A-84	46	0.2
	3155	M-5-23	A-90	44	0.2
	3156	M-5-23	A-129	44	0.2
	3157	M-6-1	—	30	0.1
	3158	M-6-1	Inhibitor for	43	0.4
			comparison 1
	3159	M-6-1	A-22	61	0.1
	3160	M-6-1	A-12	58	0.1
	3161	M-6-1	A-44	51	0.1
	3162	M-6-1	A-84	48	0.2
	3163	M-6-1	A-90	46	0.2
	3164	M-6-1	A-129	46	0.2
	3165	M-7-1	—	30	0.1
	3166	M-7-1	Inhibitor for	43	0.4
			comparison 1
	3167	M-7-1	A-22	61	0.1
	3168	M-7-1	A-12	58	0.1
	3169	M-7-1	A-44	51	0.1
	3170	M-7-1	A-84	48	0.2
	3171	M-7-1	A-90	46	0.2
	3172	M-7-1	A-129	46	0.2
	3173	M-8-12	—	27	0.1
	3174	M-8-12	Inhibitor for	40	0.4
			comparison 1
	3175	M-8-12	A-22	58	0.1
	3176	M-8-12	A-12	55	0.1
	3177	M-8-12	A-44	48	0.1
	3178	M-8-12	A-84	45	0.2
	3179	M-8-12	A-90	43	0.2
	3180	M-8-12	A-129	43	0.2
	3181	M-9-1	—	28	0.1
	3182	M-9-1	Inhibitor for	41	0.4
			comparison 1
	3183	M-9-1	A-22	59	0.1
	3184	M-9-1	A-12	56	0.1
	3185	M-9-1	A-44	49	0.1
	3186	M-9-1	A-84	46	0.2
	3187	M-9-1	A-90	44	0.2
	3188	M-9-1	A-129	44	0.2

Inhibitor for Comparison 1

The results in Table 8 clearly show that the samples to which the compounds represented by any one of formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-3), and (Ph-4) were added were high in relative residual rate and excellent in processing stability, compared with the samples to which Inhibitor for comparison 1 was added. Further, comparing samples 3103 to 3111 and the like with samples 3112 to 3116 and the like, it can be seen that, in particular, the compounds represented by formula (Ph-4) exerted outstanding effects. Further, comparing samples 3103 to 3106 and the like with samples 3108 to 3111 and the like, it can be seen that the compounds represented by formula (Ph-4), in which R_b21 was an unsubstituted aliphatic group, had much stronger effects. Further, comparing sample 3104 and the like with sample 3105 and the like, it can be seen that the compounds represented by formula (Ph-4), in which the total carbon number of R_b21 was 12 or more, exerted stronger effects than the compounds in which the total carbon number of R_b21 was 11 or less. Further, comparing sample 3103 and the like with sample 3106 and the like, it can be seen that the compounds represented by formula (Ph-4), in which the R_b21 was a straight-chain group, were superior in effects to the corresponding compounds, in which the R_b21 was branched.

Example 20

Samples 3201 to 3274 were prepared in the same manner as samples 3102, 3103, 3104, 3108, 3111, 3112, 3113, 3118, 3119, 3126, 3127, 3134, 3135, 3142, 3143, 3150, 3151, 3158, 3159, 3166, 3167, 3174, 3175, 3182 and 3183 prepared in Example 19, except that the compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) set forth in Table 9 were additionally incorporated therein. The compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) were added in an amount of 20 mole % based on the magenta coupler. In adding these compounds, each sample was prepared using such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in the third layer became a fixed quantity. Similarly to Example 19, each sample was subjected to exposure to light, and a development processing, and fastness to light was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 19.

The results obtained are shown in Table 9.

TABLE 9
			Compound of	Relative
Sample			formula (E-1),	residual
No.	Coupler	Inhibitor	(E-2) or (E-3)	rate (%)
3102	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	—	45
		comparison 1
3201	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	60
		comparison 1
3202	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-13	57
		comparison 1
3203	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-21	57
		comparison 1
3103	M-10-98	A-22	—	63
3204	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	82
3205	M-10-98	A-22	B-13	78
3206	M-10-98	A-22	B-21	78
3104	M-10-98	A-12	—	60
3207	M-10-98	A-12	B-17	79
3208	M-10-98	A-12	B-13	75
3209	M-10-98	A-12	B-21	75
3108	M-10-98	A-44	—	53
3210	M-10-98	A-44	B-17	72
3211	M-10-98	A-44	B-13	68
3212	M-10-98	A-44	B-21	68
3111	M-10-98	A-84	—	50
3213	M-10-98	A-84	B-17	69
3214	M-10-98	A-84	B-13	65
3215	M-10-98	A-84	B-21	65
3112	M-10-98	A-90	—	48
3216	M-10-98	A-90	B-17	67
3217	M-10-98	A-90	B-13	63
3218	M-10-98	A-90	B-21	63
3113	M-10-98	A-129	—	48
3219	M-10-98	A-129	B-17	67
3220	M-10-98	A-129	B-13	63
3221	M-10-98	A-129	B-21	63
3118	M-1-1	Inhibitor for	—	39
		comparison 1
3222	M-1-1	Inhibitor for	B-17	54
		comparison 1
3223	M-1-1	Inhibitor for	B-13	51
		comparison 1
3224	M-1-1	Inhibitor for	B-21	51
		comparison 1
3119	M-1-1	A-22	—	57
3225	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	76
3226	M-1-1	A-22	B-13	72
3227	M-1-1	A-22	B-21	72
3126	M-2-2	Inhibitor for	—	42
		comparison 1
3228	M-2-2	Inhibitor for	B-17	57
		comparison 1
3229	M-2-2	Inhibitor for	B-13	54
		comparison 1
3230	M-2-2	Inhibitor for	B-21	54
		comparison 1
3127	M-2-2	A-22	—	60
3230	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	79
3231	M-2-2	A-22	B-13	75
3232	M-2-2	A-22	B-21	75
3134	M-3-15	Inhibitor for	—	38
		comparison 1
3233	M-3-15	Inhibitor for	B-17	53
		comparison 1
3234	M-3-15	Inhibitor for	B-13	50
		comparison 1
3235	M-3-15	Inhibitor for	B-21	50
		comparison 1
3135	M-3-15	A-22	—	56
3236	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	75
3237	M-3-15	A-22	B-13	71
3238	M-3-15	A-22	B-21	71
3142	M-4-7	Inhibitor for	—	40
		comparison 1
3239	M-4-7	Inhibitor for	B-17	55
		comparison 1
3240	M-4-7	Inhibitor for	B-13	52
		comparison 1
3241	M-4-7	Inhibitor for	B-21	52
		comparison 1
3143	M-4-7	A-22	—	58
3242	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	77
3243	M-4-7	A-22	B-13	73
3244	M-4-7	A-22	B-21	73
3150	M-5-23	Inhibitor for	—	41
		comparison 1
3245	M-5-23	Inhibitor for	B-17	56
		comparison 1
3246	M-5-23	Inhibitor for	B-13	53
		comparison 1
3247	M-5-23	Inhibitor for	B-21	53
		comparison 1
3151	M-5-23	A-22	—	59
3248	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	78
3249	M-5-23	A-22	B-13	74
3250	M-5-23	A-22	B-21	74
3158	M-6-1	Inhibitor for	—	43
		comparison 1
3251	M-6-1	Inhibitor for	B-17	58
		comparison 1
3252	M-6-1	Inhibitor for	B-13	55
		comparison 1
3253	M-6-1	Inhibitor for	B-21	55
		comparison 1
3159	M-6-1	A-22	—	61
3254	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	80
3255	M-6-1	A-22	B-13	76
3256	M-6-1	A-22	B-21	76
3166	M-7-1	Inhibitor for	—	43
		comparison 1
3257	M-7-1	Inhibitor for	B-17	58
		comparison 1
3258	M-7-1	Inhibitor for	B-13	55
		comparison 1
3259	M-7-1	Inhibitor for	B-21	55
		comparison 1
3167	M-7-1	A-22	—	61
3260	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	80
3261	M-7-1	A-22	B-13	76
3262	M-7-1	A-22	B-21	76
3174	M-8-12	Inhibitor for	—	40
		comparison 1
3263	M-8-12	Inhibitor for	B-17	55
		comparison 1
3264	M-8-12	Inhibitor for	B-13	52
		comparison 1
3265	M-8-12	Inhibitor for	B-21	52
		comparison 1
3175	M-8-12	A-22	—	58
3266	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	77
3267	M-8-12	A-22	B-13	73
3268	M-8-12	A-22	B-21	73
3182	M-9-1	Inhibitor for	—	41
		comparison 1
3269	M-9-1	Inhibitor for	B-17	56
		comparison 1
3270	M-9-1	Inhibitor for	B-13	53
		comparison 1
3271	M-9-1	Inhibitor for	B-21	53
		comparison 1
3183	M-9-1	A-22	—	59
3272	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	78
3273	M-9-1	A-22	B-13	74
3274	M-9-1	A-22	B-21	74

The results in Table 9 clearly show that image fastness was further improved by adding the compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3). The degree of improvement was more outstanding in the samples to which the compound represented by formula (Ph-1) or (Ph-3) was added, compared with the samples free of the said compound.

Example 21

Samples 3301 to 3454 were prepared in the same manner as samples 3201, 3204, 3225, 3230, 3236, 3242, 3248, 3254, 3260, 3266 and 3272 in Example 20, except that other inhibitor compounds set forth in Table 10 were additionally incorporated therein. The other inhibitor compounds were added in an amount 20 mole % based on the magenta coupler. In this adding of the other inhibitor compounds, each sample was prepared using such a reduced amount of solvent that oil-soluble contents in the third layer became a fixed quantity. Similarly to Example 19, each sample was subjected to exposure to light, and a development processing, and fastness to light was evaluated in the same manner as in Example 19.

The results obtained are shown in Table 10.

TABLE 10
			Compound
			of formula		Relative
Sample			(E-1), (E-2)	Other	residual
No.	Coupler	Inhibitor	or (E-3)	Inhibitor	rate (%)
3201	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	—	60
		comparison 1
3301	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	TI-17	63
		comparison 1
3302	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	TII-16	63
		comparison 1
3303	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	TIII-15	62
		comparison 1
3304	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	TIV-12	62
		comparison 1
3305	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	TV-4	62
		comparison 1
3306	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	TVI-23	62
		comparison 1
3307	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	TVII-1	62
		comparison 1
3308	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	TVII-19	63
		comparison 1
3309	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	UA-5	63
		comparison 1
3310	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	UB-3	62
		comparison 1
3311	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	UC-2	62
		comparison 1
3312	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	UD-7	62
		comparison 1
3313	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	UE-2	63
		comparison 1
3314	M-10-98	Inhibitor for	B-17	P-2	63
		comparison 1
3204	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	—	82
3315	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	TI-17	87
3316	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	TII-16	87
3317	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	TIII-15	85
3318	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	85
3319	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	TV-4	85
3320	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	TVI-23	85
3321	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	TVII-1	85
3322	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	TVII-19	87
3323	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	UA-5	87
3324	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	UB-3	85
3325	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	UC-2	85
3326	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	UD-7	85
3327	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	UE-2	87
3328	M-10-98	A-22	B-17	P-2	87
3225	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	—	76
3329	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	TI-17	81
3330	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	TII-16	81
3331	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	TIII-15	79
3332	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	79
3333	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	TV-4	79
3334	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	TVI-23	79
3335	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	TVII-1	79
3336	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	TVII-19	81
3337	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	UA-5	81
3338	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	UB-3	79
3339	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	UC-2	79
3340	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	UD-7	79
3341	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	UE-2	81
3342	M-1-1	A-22	B-17	P-2	81
3230	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	—	79
3343	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	TI-17	84
3344	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	TII-16	84
3345	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	TIII-15	82
3346	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	82
3347	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	TV-4	82
3348	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	TVI-23	82
3349	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	TVII-1	82
3350	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	TVII-19	84
3351	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	UA-5	84
3352	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	UB-3	82
3353	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	UC-2	82
3354	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	UD-7	82
3355	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	UE-2	84
3356	M-2-2	A-22	B-17	P-2	84
3236	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	—	75
3357	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	TI-17	80
3358	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	TII-16	80
3359	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	TIII-15	78
3360	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	78
3361	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	TV-4	78
3362	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	TVI-23	78
3363	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	TVII-1	78
3364	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	TVII-19	80
3365	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	UA-5	80
3366	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	UB-3	78
3367	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	UC-2	78
3368	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	UD-7	78
3369	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	UE-2	80
3370	M-3-15	A-22	B-17	P-2	80
3242	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	—	77
3371	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	TI-17	82
3372	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	TII-16	82
3373	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	TIII-15	80
3374	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	80
3375	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	TV-4	80
3376	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	TVI-23	80
3377	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	TVII-1	80
3378	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	TVII-19	82
3379	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	UA-5	82
3380	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	UB-3	80
3381	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	UC-2	80
3382	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	UD-7	80
3383	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	UE-2	82
3384	M-4-7	A-22	B-17	P-2	82
3248	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	—	78
3385	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	TI-17	83
3386	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	TII-16	83
3387	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	TIII-15	81
3388	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	81
3389	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	TV-4	81
3390	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	TVI-23	81
3391	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	TVII-1	81
3392	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	TVII-19	83
3393	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	UA-5	83
3394	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	UB-3	81
3395	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	UC-2	81
3396	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	UD-7	81
3397	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	UE-2	83
3398	M-5-23	A-22	B-17	P-2	83
3254	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	—	80
3399	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	TI-17	85
3400	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	TII-16	85
3401	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	TIII-15	83
3402	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	83
3403	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	TV-4	83
3404	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	TVI-23	83
3405	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	TVII-1	83
3406	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	TVII-19	85
3407	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	UA-5	85
3408	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	UB-3	83
3409	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	UC-2	83
3410	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	UD-7	83
3411	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	UE-2	85
3412	M-6-1	A-22	B-17	P-2	85
3260	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	—	80
3413	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	TI-17	85
3414	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	TII-16	85
3415	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	TIII-15	83
3416	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	83
3417	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	TV-4	83
3418	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	TVI-23	83
3419	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	TVII-1	83
3420	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	TVII-19	85
3421	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	UA-5	85
3422	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	UB-3	83
3423	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	UC-2	83
3424	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	UD-7	83
3425	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	UE-2	85
3426	M-7-1	A-22	B-17	P-2	85
3266	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	—	77
3427	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	TI-17	82
3428	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	TII-16	82
3429	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	TIII-15	80
3430	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	80
3431	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	TV-4	80
3432	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	TVI-23	80
3433	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	TVII-1	80
3434	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	TVII-19	82
3435	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	UA-5	82
3436	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	UB-3	80
3437	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	UC-2	80
3438	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	UD-7	80
3439	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	UE-2	82
3440	M-8-12	A-22	B-17	P-2	82
3272	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	—	78
3441	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	T1-17	83
3442	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	TII-16	83
3443	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	TIII-15	81
3444	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	TIV-12	81
3445	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	TV-4	81
3446	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	TVI-23	81
3447	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	TVII-1	81
3448	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	TVII-19	83
3449	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	UA-5	83
3450	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	UB-3	81
3451	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	UC-2	81
3452	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	UD-7	81
3453	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	UE-2	83
3454	M-9-1	A-22	B-17	P-2	83

The results in Table 10 clearly show that the image fastness was further improved by adding any one of the following compounds: the compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII), the metal complex, the ultraviolet-ray absorbing agent, and the water-insoluble homoplymer or copolymer. The degree of improvement was more outstanding in the samples to which the compound represented by formula (Ph-1) or (Ph-3) was added compared with the samples free of the compound.

Example 22

Samples were prepared in the same manner as samples 3101 to 3188 of Example 19, samples 3201 to 3274 of Example 20, and samples 3301 to 3454 of Example 21, except that the kind of the ultraviolet-ray absorbing agent in the second layer, the third layer and the forth layer was changed from (UV-A) to (UV-B). The same evaluations as in Example 19 were carried out, and essentially the same results were obtained.

Example 23

Samples were prepared in the same manner as samples 3101 to 3188 of Example 19, samples 3201 to 3274 of Example 20, and samples 3301 to 3454 of Example 21, except that (Cpd-4) of the second layer and the fourth layer was replaced with an equivalent molar amount of (Cpd-12) respectively. The same evaluations as in Example 19 were carried out, and improvement of fastness to light, owing to combined use of the coupler and additive(s) for use in the present invention, was confirmed. The resulted effects were particularly remarkable.

Example 24

Samples were prepared in the same manner as samples in Example 23, except that the support was replaced with a PET reflection support of 175 μm thickness, in which PET was kneaded with barium sulfate. The evaluations according to Example 19 were carried out, and essentially the same results were obtained.

Example 25

Each samples 3101 to 3188 of Example 19, samples 3201 to 3274 of Example 20, and samples 3301 to 3454 of Example 21 were scan-exposed by means of each exposure apparatus set forth bellow, and evaluated according to Example 19. The thus-obtained results demonstrate that use of samples having constitutions according to the present invention exhibited the effects of the present invention: they were excellent in fastness to light and processing stability.

Exposure apparatus to be used

Digital mini-lab FRONTIER 330 (trade name, manufactured by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.)

Lambda 130. (trade name, manufactured by Durst Co.)

LIGHTJET 5000 (trade name, manufactured by Gretag Co.)

Example 26

Samples were prepared in the same manner as the samples in Example 19, except for changing the composition as set forth below.

Coating amount of the blue-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer: 240%

Coating amount of the green-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer: 250%

Coating amount of the red-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer: 260%

Support: 180 μm thick polyethylene terephthalate transparent support

Each of these samples was processed according to processing process B in Example 1. However, in this processing process B, each of the processing steps was prolonged by 2.7 times. The same evaluations as in Example 19 were conducted. The thus-obtained results demonstrate that use of a combination of the magenta coupler for use in the present invention, and the compound(s) according to the present invention, gave photosensitive materials excellent in image fastness.

Having described our invention as related to the present embodiments, it is our intention that the invention not be limited by any of the details of the description, unless otherwise specified, but rather be construed broadly within its spirit and scope as set out in the accompanying claims.

This nonprovisional application claims priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119 (a) on Patent Application No. 2002-382505 filed in Japan on Dec. 27, 2002, on Patent Application No. 2003-97156 filed in Japan on Mar. 31, 2003, and on Patent Application No. 2003-97255 filed in Japan on Mar. 31, 2003, which are herein incorporated by reference.

Claims

1. A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material comprising, on a support, at least one yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, at least one magenta color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, and at least one cyan color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, wherein at least one dye-forming coupler is contained in the same layer as at least one compound represented by formula (Ph), and wherein the at least one dye-forming coupler is a yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) set forth below or a magenta dye-forming coupler, represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X) set forth below: wherein, in formula (I), Q represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N(R1a)—; R1a represents a substituent; R2a represents a substituent; m represents an integer of 0 or more and 5 or less; when m is 2 or more, R2as may be the same or different, and they may combine together to form a ring; and X1 represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent; wherein, in formula (M-I), Y1 and Y2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group; R1 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R2 represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R2 has a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; p represents 0, 1, or 2; and when p is 2, a plurality of R1s may be the same or different; wherein, in formula (M-II), Y3 and Y4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a heterocyclic oxy group; R3 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R4 represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R4 has a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; q represents 0, 1, or 2; and when q is 2, a plurality of R3s may be the same or different; wherein, in formula (M-III), L1 represents —NR7— or —O—; R5 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R6 represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R7 represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R6 and R7 have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; r represents 0, 1, or 2; and when r is 2, a plurality of R5s may be the same or different; wherein, in formula (M-IV), L2 represents —NR10- or —O—; R8 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R9 represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R10 represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R9 and R10 have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; X represents a halogen atom; s represents 0, 1, or 2; and when s is 2, a plurality of R8s may be the same or different; wherein, in formula (M-V), R11 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R12 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group; R13 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a sulfinyl group, or a hydroxyl group; R14 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group; X represents a halogen atom; t represents 0, 1, or 2; and when t is 2, a plurality of R11s may be the same or different; wherein, in formula (M-VI), R15 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; R16, R17, and R18 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a cycloalkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic oxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, or a hydroxyl group; X represents a halogen atom; u represents 0, 1, or 2; and when u is 2, a plurality of R15s may be the same or different; wherein, in formula (M-VII), R19 and R20 each independently represent an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; v and w each independently represent 0 or 1, but both v and w are not 0s at the same time; L3 represents —NR22— or —O—; X represents 0 or 1; R21 represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R22 represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R21 and R22 have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; and X represents a halogen atom; wherein, in formula (M-VIII), R23 and R24 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group; R25 represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; R26 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; y represents 0, 1, or 2; when y is 2, a plurality of R26s may be the same or different; L4 represents a divalent linking group selected from —(C═O)—, —(C═O)—O—, —O—(C═O)—, —(C═O)—NR27—, —NR27—(C═O)—, —NR27—(C═O)—NR27— —O— (C═O)—NR27—, —NR27—(C═O)—O—, —O—, —S—, —SO—, —SO2—, and —NR27—; R27 represents a hydrogen atom, or a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R25 and R27 have a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; and X represents a halogen atom; wherein, in formula (M-IX), R28 represents a substituted or unsubstituted, alkyl group, alkenyl group, cycloalkyl group, aryl group, or heterocyclic group; when R28 has a substituent, the substituent is selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group and a hydroxyl group, each of which may be further substituted; R29 represents an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a halogen atom, a cycloalkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkylthio group, a cycloalkylthio group, an arylthio group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamoyl group, a ureido group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an amido group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfonyl group, an amino group, a cyano group, a nitro group, or a hydroxyl group; X represents a halogen atom; z represents 0, 1, or 2; and when z is 2, a plurality of R29s may be the same or different; wherein, in formula (M-X), R3, represents a tertiary alkyl group; R32 and R33 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent; X represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or an aryloxy group; A and B each independently represent —CO— or —SO2—; a represents 0 or 1; R34 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group; R35 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylamino group or an arylamino group; and R34 and R35 may bond with each other to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; wherein, in formula (Ph), Rb1 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; and Rb2 to Rb5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group.

2. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 1, wherein the layer containing the at least one dye-forming coupler and the compound represented by formula (Ph) is a yellow color-forming photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer, in which the dye-forming coupler is the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I), and wherein said layer further contains at least one compound represented by formula (TS-II) set forth below: wherein, in formula (TS-II), R61, R62, R63, and R64 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or an aliphatic group; each combination of R61 and R62, and R63 and R64 may bond to each other to form a 5- to 7-membered ring; X61 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aliphatic oxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an aliphatic oxycarbonyloxy group, an aryloxycarbonyloxy group, an aliphatic sulfonyl group, an aryl sulfonyl group, an aliphatic sulfinyl group, an arylsulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a carbamoyl group, a hydroxyl group, or an oxy radical group; X62 represents a group of non-metal atoms necessary to form a 5- to 7-membered ring together with the —C(—R61)(—R62)—N(—X61)—C(—R63)(—R64)—.

3. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 2, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) set forth below:

4. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 2, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I), (TS-III), (TS-IV), (TS-V), (TS-VI), and (TS-VII) set forth below:

5. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 2, wherein the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (I) is a yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II):

6. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 5, wherein, in the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II), R1a is a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group.

7. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 6, wherein, in the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II), R1a represents a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having at least 2 carbon atoms; m is an integer of from 1 to 5; at least one R2a is located in an ortho-position to the —CONH— group, and is a group or atom selected from a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkyl group, an alkylthio group and an arylthio group; and X1 is a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidation product of a developing agent.

8. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 7, wherein, in the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II), R1a is an alkoxypropyl group; and at least one R2a is an alkylthio group located in an ortho-position to the —CONH— group.

9. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 8, wherein, in the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II), at least one R2a is an alkylthio group located in an ortho-position to the —CONH— group, and another R2a is a t-butyl group located in the para-position to the alkylthio group.

10. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 5, wherein, in the yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (II), X1 is a 5,5-dimethyloxazolidine-2,4-dione-3-yl group.

11. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 1, wherein the at least one dye-forming coupler is a yellow dye-forming coupler represented by formula (Ia) set forth below: wherein, in formula (Ia), Qa represents a group of non-metal atoms that forms a 5- to 7-membered ring in combination with the —N═C—N((CH2)3O—R11a)—; R11a represents an alkyl group having carbon atoms of 4 or more and 8 or less; R2a represents a substituent; R14a represents a primary alkyl group; ma represents an integer of 0 or more and 4 or less; when ma is 2 or more, R2 as may be the same or different, and they may combine together to form a ring; and X1 represents a hydrogen atom, or a group capable of being split-off upon a coupling reaction with an oxidized product of a developing agent.

12. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 11, wherein the compound represented by formula (Ph) is a compound represented by any one of formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-2) and (Ph-3): wherein, in formulae (Ph-1), (Ph-0.2) and (Ph-3), Rb1 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; Rb6 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an amino group, or an acyl group; Rb7 to Rb9, Rb11 to Rb16, Rb19, and Rb20 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group; Rb10 represents a hydrogen atom, an aliphatic group, an acyl group, an oxycarbonyl group, a silyl group, or a phosphoryl group; and Xb represents an alkylene-linking group, a phenylene-linking group, an —O— linking group, or a —S— linking group; Rb17 and Rb18 each independently represent an aliphatic group, or an aryl group.

13. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 12, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) set forth below:

14. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 11, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII) set forth below:

15. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 1, wherein the compound represented by formula (Ph) is a compound represented by formula (Ph-1) or (Ph-3) set forth below, and wherein the at least one dye-forming coupler is the magenta dye-forming coupler, represented by any one of formulae (M-I) to (M-X): wherein, in formulae (Ph-1) and (Ph-3), Rb1 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a carbonyl group, or a sulfonyl group; Rb6 represents an aliphatic group, an aryl group, an amino group, or an acyl group; Rb7 to Rb9, Rb19, and Rb20 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an aliphatic group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic oxy group, an oxycarbonyl group, an acyl group, an acyloxy group, an oxycarbonyloxy group, a carbamoyl group, an acylamino group, a sulfonyl group, a sulfinyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group; and Rb17 and Rb18 each independently represent an aliphatic group or an aryl group.

16. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive as claimed in claim 15, wherein the compound represented by formula (Ph-1) or (Ph-3) is a compound represented by formula (Ph-4): wherein, in formula (Ph-4), Rb21 represents a straight-chain, branched or cyclic, saturated or unsaturated, and unsubstituted aliphatic group, or a straight-chain, branched or cyclic, and saturated or unsaturated aliphatic group substituted with a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, —SRb30, —CONRb30Rb31, —CO2Rb30, or —OC(═O)Rb30, in which Rb30 and Rb31 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, or a straight-chain, branched, or cyclic, unsubstituted aliphatic group.

17. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 16, wherein, in the compound represented by formula (Ph-4), Rb21 is a straight-chain, branched, or cyclic, saturated or unsaturated, and unsubstituted aliphatic group.

18. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 16, wherein, in the compound represented by formula (Ph-4), the sum total of carbon atoms in Rb21 is at least 12.

19. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 15, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by any one of formulae (E-1) to (E-3) set forth below:

20. The silver halide color photographic photosensitive material as claimed in claim 15, further containing at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a metal complex, a ultraviolet absorbing agent, a water-insoluble homopolymer or copolymer, and a compound represented by any one of formulae (TS-I) to (TS-VII) set forth below: